(datarootdir): Define.
[emacs.git] / man / texinfo.tex
blob4d47842579badd69dfdab8d342bd0ba560a5a3d6
1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
6 \def\texinfoversion{2006-11-08.17}
8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free
10 % Software Foundation, Inc.
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
15 % your option) any later version.
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
20 % General Public License for more details.
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
24 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
25 % Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
27 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
28 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
29 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
34 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
35 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
46 % tex foo.texi
47 % texindex foo.??
48 % tex foo.texi
49 % tex foo.texi
50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57 % full Texinfo distribution.
59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
62 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
70 \message{Basics,}
71 \chardef\other=12
73 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
74 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
75 \let\+ = \relax
77 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78 \let\ptexb=\b
79 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
80 \let\ptexc=\c
81 \let\ptexcomma=\,
82 \let\ptexdot=\.
83 \let\ptexdots=\dots
84 \let\ptexend=\end
85 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
86 \let\ptexexclam=\!
87 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88 \let\ptexgtr=>
89 \let\ptexhat=^
90 \let\ptexi=\i
91 \let\ptexindent=\indent
92 \let\ptexinsert=\insert
93 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
94 \let\ptexless=<
95 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
96 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
97 \let\ptexplus=+
98 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
99 \let\ptexslash=\/
100 \let\ptexstar=\*
101 \let\ptext=\t
103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104 % starts a new line in the output.
105 \newlinechar = `^^J
107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
112 \else
113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
120 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
121 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
122 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
123 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
124 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
125 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
126 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
127 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
128 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
129 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
130 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
131 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
132 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
133 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
134 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
135 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
137 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
138 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
139 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
140 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
141 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
142 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
143 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
144 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
145 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
146 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
147 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
148 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
150 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
151 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
152 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
153 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
154 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
156 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
157 \chardef\spacecat = 10
158 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
160 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
161 \chardef\colonChar = `\:
162 \chardef\commaChar = `\,
163 \chardef\dashChar = `\-
164 \chardef\dotChar = `\.
165 \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
166 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
167 \chardef\questChar = `\?
168 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
169 \chardef\semiChar = `\;
170 \chardef\underChar = `\_
172 % Ignore a token.
174 \def\gobble#1{}
176 % The following is used inside several \edef's.
177 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
179 % Hyphenation fixes.
180 \hyphenation{
181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
186 spell-ing spell-ings
187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
188 wide-spread wrap-around
191 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
192 \newdimen\bindingoffset
193 \newdimen\normaloffset
194 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
196 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
197 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
198 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
200 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
202 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
203 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
204 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
205 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
206 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
208 \def\|{%
209 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
210 \leavevmode
212 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
213 \vadjust{%
214 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
215 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
216 \vskip-\baselineskip
218 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
219 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
220 \llap{%
222 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
223 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
225 % This is the space between the bar and the text.
226 \hskip 12pt
231 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
232 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
233 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
234 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
235 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
237 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
238 \def\loggingall{%
239 \tracingstats2
240 \tracingpages1
241 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
242 \tracingparagraphs1
243 \tracingoutput1
244 \tracingmacros2
245 \tracingrestores1
246 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
247 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
248 \tracingscantokens1
249 \tracingifs1
250 \tracinggroups1
251 \tracingnesting2
252 \tracingassigns1
254 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
255 \errorcontextlines16
258 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
259 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
261 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
262 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
263 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
264 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
265 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
266 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
268 % For @cropmarks command.
269 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
271 \newif\ifcropmarks
272 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
274 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
275 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
277 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
278 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
279 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
280 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
282 % Main output routine.
283 \chardef\PAGE = 255
284 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
286 \newbox\headlinebox
287 \newbox\footlinebox
289 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
290 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
291 \def\onepageout#1{%
292 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
294 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
295 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
297 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
298 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
299 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
300 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
303 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
304 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
305 % before the \shipout runs.
307 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
308 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
309 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
310 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
311 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
312 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
313 % it needs to be
314 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
315 \shipout\vbox{%
316 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
317 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
319 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
320 \hsize = \outerhsize
321 \vskip-\topandbottommargin
322 \vtop to0pt{%
323 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
324 \nointerlineskip
325 \line{%
326 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
327 \hfill
328 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
330 \vss}%
331 \vskip\topandbottommargin
332 \line\bgroup
333 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
334 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
335 \vbox\bgroup
338 \unvbox\headlinebox
339 \pagebody{#1}%
340 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
341 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
342 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
343 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
344 \vskip 24pt
345 \unvbox\footlinebox
348 \ifcropmarks
349 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
350 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
351 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
352 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
353 \vbox to0pt{\vss
354 \line{%
355 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
356 \hfill
357 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
359 \nointerlineskip
360 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
362 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
364 }% end of \shipout\vbox
365 }% end of group with \indexdummies
366 \advancepageno
367 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
370 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
372 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
373 {\catcode`\@ =11
374 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
375 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
376 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
377 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
378 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
379 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
380 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
383 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
384 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
385 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
387 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
388 \def\nstop{\vbox
389 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
390 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
391 \def\nsbot{\vbox
392 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
394 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
395 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
396 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
398 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
399 \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
400 \def\argtorun{#2}%
401 \begingroup
402 \obeylines
403 \spaceisspace
405 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
408 {\obeylines %
409 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
410 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
411 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
415 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
416 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
417 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
419 % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
421 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
422 % @end itemize @c foo
423 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
424 % by \finishparsearg.
426 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
427 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
428 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
429 \def\temp{#3}%
430 \ifx\temp\empty
431 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
432 \let\temp\finishparsearg
433 \else
434 \let\temp\argcheckspaces
436 % Put the space token in:
437 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
440 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
441 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
442 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
443 % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
444 % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
445 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
446 % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
448 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
450 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
452 % \parseargdef\foo{...}
453 % is roughly equivalent to
454 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
455 % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
457 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
458 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
460 \def\parseargdef#1{%
461 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
463 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
464 \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
465 \def#1##1%
468 % Several utility definitions with active space:
470 \obeyspaces
471 \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
473 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
474 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
475 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
476 % should produce a line of output anyway.
478 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
480 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
481 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
482 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
483 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
487 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
489 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
491 % \envdef\foo{...}
492 % \def\Efoo{...}
494 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
495 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
496 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
497 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
498 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
500 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
501 % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The
502 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
503 % special case.)
506 % At runtime, environments start with this:
507 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
508 % initialize
509 \let\thisenv\empty
511 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
512 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
513 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
515 % Check whether we're in the right environment:
516 \def\checkenv#1{%
517 \def\temp{#1}%
518 \ifx\thisenv\temp
519 \else
520 \badenverr
524 % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
525 \def\badenverr{%
526 \errhelp = \EMsimple
527 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
528 not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
530 \def\inenvironment#1{%
531 \ifx#1\empty
532 out of any environment%
533 \else
534 in environment \expandafter\string#1%
538 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
539 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
541 \parseargdef\end{%
542 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
543 \else
544 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
545 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
546 \csname E#1\endcsname
547 \endgroup
551 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
554 %% Simple single-character @ commands
556 % @@ prints an @
557 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
558 \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
560 % This is turned off because it was never documented
561 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
562 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
563 %% but suppressing ligatures.
564 %\def\`{{`}}
565 %\def\'{{'}}
567 % Used to generate quoted braces.
568 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
569 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
570 \let\{=\mylbrace
571 \let\}=\myrbrace
572 \begingroup
573 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
574 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
575 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
576 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
577 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
578 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
579 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
580 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
581 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
582 !endgroup
584 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
585 \let\comma = ,
587 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
588 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
589 \let\, = \c
590 \let\dotaccent = \.
591 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
592 \let\tieaccent = \t
593 \let\ubaraccent = \b
594 \let\udotaccent = \d
596 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
597 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
598 \def\questiondown{?`}
599 \def\exclamdown{!`}
600 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
601 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
603 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
604 \def\imacro{i}
605 \def\jmacro{j}
606 \def\dotless#1{%
607 \def\temp{#1}%
608 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
609 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
610 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
611 \fi\fi
614 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
615 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
617 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
619 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
620 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
621 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
622 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
623 % \scriptscriptstyle).
625 \def\LaTeX{%
626 L\kern-.36em
627 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
628 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
629 \kern-.15em
630 \TeX
633 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
634 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
635 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
636 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
637 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
638 {\catcode`@ = 11
639 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
640 % if the definition is written into an index file.
641 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
642 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
645 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
646 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
648 % @* forces a line break.
649 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
651 % @/ allows a line break.
652 \let\/=\allowbreak
654 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
655 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
657 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
658 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
660 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
661 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
663 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
665 \def\onword{on}
666 \def\offword{off}
668 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
669 \def\temp{#1}%
670 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
671 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
672 \else
673 \errhelp = \EMsimple
674 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
675 \fi\fi
678 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
679 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
680 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
681 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
683 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
684 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
685 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
686 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
687 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
688 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
689 % the text is small, which looks bad.
691 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
692 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
693 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
694 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
695 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
696 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
698 \newbox\groupbox
699 \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
701 \envdef\group{%
702 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
703 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
704 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
706 \startsavinginserts
708 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
709 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
710 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
711 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
712 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
713 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
714 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
715 \comment
718 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
719 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
720 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
721 % above. But it's pretty close.
722 \def\Egroup{%
723 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
724 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
725 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
726 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
727 \egroup % End the \vtop.
728 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
729 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
730 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
731 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
732 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
733 % group, force a page break.
734 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
735 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
736 \page
739 \box\groupbox
740 \prevdepth = \dimen1
741 \checkinserts
744 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
745 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
747 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
748 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
749 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
751 % @need space-in-mils
752 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
754 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
756 % Old definition--didn't work.
757 %\parseargdef\need{\par %
758 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
759 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
760 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
761 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
762 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
765 \parseargdef\need{%
766 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
767 % paragraph.
768 \par
770 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
771 \dimen0 = #1\mil
772 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
773 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
774 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
776 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
777 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
778 % And a page break here is fine.
779 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
781 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
782 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
783 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
784 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
785 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
787 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
788 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
789 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
790 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
791 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
792 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
793 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
794 \penalty9999
796 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
797 \kern -#1\mil
799 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
800 \nobreak
804 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
806 \let\br = \par
808 % @page forces the start of a new page.
810 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
812 % @exdent text....
813 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
815 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
816 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
817 \newskip\exdentamount
819 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
820 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
822 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
823 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
824 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
826 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
827 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
828 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
830 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
831 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
833 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
834 \nobreak
835 \kern-\strutdepth
836 \vtop to \strutdepth{%
837 \baselineskip=\strutdepth
838 \vss
839 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
840 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
841 \ifx#1l%
842 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
843 \else
844 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
846 \null
849 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
850 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
852 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
853 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
854 % else use TEXT for both).
856 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
857 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
858 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
859 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
860 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
861 \def\righttext{#2}%
862 \else
863 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
864 \def\righttext{#1}%
867 \ifodd\pageno
868 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
869 \else
870 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
872 \temp
875 % @include file insert text of that file as input.
877 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
878 \def\includezzz#1{%
879 \pushthisfilestack
880 \def\thisfile{#1}%
882 \makevalueexpandable
883 \def\temp{\input #1 }%
884 \expandafter
885 }\temp
886 \popthisfilestack
888 \def\filenamecatcodes{%
889 \catcode`\\=\other
890 \catcode`~=\other
891 \catcode`^=\other
892 \catcode`_=\other
893 \catcode`|=\other
894 \catcode`<=\other
895 \catcode`>=\other
896 \catcode`+=\other
897 \catcode`-=\other
900 \def\pushthisfilestack{%
901 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
903 \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
904 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
906 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
907 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
910 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
911 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
912 the stack of filenames is empty.}}
914 \def\thisfile{}
916 % @center line
917 % outputs that line, centered.
919 \parseargdef\center{%
920 \ifhmode
921 \let\next\centerH
922 \else
923 \let\next\centerV
925 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
927 \def\centerH#1{%
929 \hfil\break
930 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
931 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
932 \line{#1}%
933 \break
936 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
938 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
940 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
942 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
943 % @c is the same as @comment
944 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
946 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
947 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
948 \commentxxx}
949 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
951 \let\c=\comment
953 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
954 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
955 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
956 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
958 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
959 \def\noneword{none}
961 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
962 \def\temp{#1}%
963 \ifx\temp\asisword
964 \else
965 \ifx\temp\noneword
966 \defaultparindent = 0pt
967 \else
968 \defaultparindent = #1em
971 \parindent = \defaultparindent
974 % @exampleindent NCHARS
975 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
976 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
977 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
978 \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
979 \def\temp{#1}%
980 \ifx\temp\asisword
981 \else
982 \ifx\temp\noneword
983 \lispnarrowing = 0pt
984 \else
985 \lispnarrowing = #1em
990 % @firstparagraphindent WORD
991 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
992 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
993 % paragraphs.
995 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
996 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
997 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
998 % By default, we suppress indentation.
1000 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
1001 \def\insertword{insert}
1003 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
1004 \def\temp{#1}%
1005 \ifx\temp\noneword
1006 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
1007 \else\ifx\temp\insertword
1008 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
1009 \else
1010 \errhelp = \EMsimple
1011 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1012 \fi\fi
1015 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
1016 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1018 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1019 % paragraph.
1021 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1022 \gdef\indent{%
1023 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1024 \indent
1026 \gdef\noindent{%
1027 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1028 \noindent
1030 \global\everypar = {%
1031 \kern -\parindent
1032 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1036 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1037 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1038 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1039 \global \everypar = {}%
1043 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
1045 \def\asis#1{#1}
1047 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1049 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1050 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
1051 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1052 % which is what @var uses.
1054 \catcode`\_ = \active
1055 \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1056 \catcode`\_=\active
1057 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1060 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1061 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1062 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
1063 % otherwise define @\.
1065 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1066 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1068 \def\math{%
1069 \tex
1070 \mathunderscore
1071 \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1072 \mathactive
1073 $\finishmath
1075 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
1077 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1078 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1079 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1082 \catcode`^ = \active
1083 \catcode`< = \active
1084 \catcode`> = \active
1085 \catcode`+ = \active
1086 \gdef\mathactive{%
1087 \let^ = \ptexhat
1088 \let< = \ptexless
1089 \let> = \ptexgtr
1090 \let+ = \ptexplus
1094 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
1095 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1096 \def\minus{$-$}
1098 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1099 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
1100 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
1101 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
1102 % whichever is larger.
1104 \def\dots{%
1105 \leavevmode
1106 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
1107 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
1108 \dimen0 = \wd0
1109 \else
1110 \dimen0 = 1.5em
1112 \hbox to \dimen0{%
1113 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
1114 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
1115 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
1116 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
1120 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1122 \def\enddots{%
1123 \dots
1124 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
1127 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1128 % Texinfo's parsing.
1130 \let\comma = ,
1132 % @refill is a no-op.
1133 \let\refill=\relax
1135 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1136 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1137 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1139 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1140 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1142 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1143 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1144 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1145 \def\setfilename{%
1146 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1147 \iflinks
1148 \tryauxfile
1149 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1150 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1151 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1152 \openindices
1153 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1155 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1156 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1157 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1158 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1159 \closein 1
1161 \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1164 % Called from \setfilename.
1166 \def\openindices{%
1167 \newindex{cp}%
1168 \newcodeindex{fn}%
1169 \newcodeindex{vr}%
1170 \newcodeindex{tp}%
1171 \newcodeindex{ky}%
1172 \newcodeindex{pg}%
1175 % @bye.
1176 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1179 \message{pdf,}
1180 % adobe `portable' document format
1181 \newcount\tempnum
1182 \newcount\lnkcount
1183 \newtoks\filename
1184 \newcount\filenamelength
1185 \newcount\pgn
1186 \newtoks\toksA
1187 \newtoks\toksB
1188 \newtoks\toksC
1189 \newtoks\toksD
1190 \newbox\boxA
1191 \newcount\countA
1192 \newif\ifpdf
1193 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1195 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1196 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
1197 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
1198 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1199 \else
1200 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1201 \else
1202 \ifcase\pdfoutput
1203 \else
1204 \pdftrue
1209 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1210 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1211 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1212 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1213 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
1214 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
1215 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1216 % that's what we do).
1218 % double active backslashes.
1220 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
1221 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
1222 @catcode`@\=@active
1223 @let\=@doublebackslash}
1226 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
1227 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
1228 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens. I've
1229 % tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
1231 % #1 is the tokens to replace.
1232 % #2 is the replacement.
1233 % #3 is the control sequence with the string.
1235 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
1236 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
1237 ##1%
1238 \ifx\\##2\\%
1239 \else
1241 \HyReturnAfterFi{%
1242 \HyPsdReplace##2\END
1246 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
1248 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
1250 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
1251 \def\backslashparens#1{%
1252 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
1253 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
1254 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
1255 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
1258 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1259 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1260 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1261 output) for that.)}
1263 \ifpdf
1264 \input pdfcolor
1265 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
1266 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1267 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1268 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1269 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1271 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
1272 % others). Let's try in that order.
1273 \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1274 \begingroup
1275 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1276 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1277 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1278 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1279 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1280 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1281 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1282 \else
1283 \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1285 \else
1286 \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1288 \else
1289 \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1291 \else
1292 \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1294 \else
1295 \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1297 \closein 1
1298 \endgroup
1300 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1301 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1302 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1303 \immediate\pdfimage
1304 \else
1305 \immediate\pdfximage
1307 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
1308 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
1309 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1310 #1.\pdfimgext
1311 \else
1312 {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1314 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1315 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1316 \fi}
1317 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1318 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1319 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1320 \atdummies
1321 \activebackslashdouble
1322 \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1323 \backslashparens\pdfdestname
1324 \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
1327 % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1328 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
1330 \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1331 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
1332 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1333 % come from Petr Olsak
1334 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1335 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1336 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1337 \advance\tempnum by 1
1338 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1340 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1341 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1342 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1343 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1344 % #4 is the page number
1346 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1347 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1348 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1349 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1350 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1351 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1352 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1353 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1354 \else
1355 % Doubled backslashes in the name.
1356 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1357 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
1360 % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
1361 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1362 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
1364 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1367 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1368 \begingroup
1369 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1370 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1371 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1373 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1374 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1375 \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1376 \def\thissecnum{0}%
1377 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1379 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1380 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1381 \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1382 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1384 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1385 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1386 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1388 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1389 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1391 \def\thischapnum{0}%
1392 \def\thissecnum{0}%
1393 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1395 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1396 % al. a second time, below.
1397 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1398 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1399 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1400 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1401 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1402 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1403 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1404 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1405 \readdatafile{toc}%
1407 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1408 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1409 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1411 % We use the node names as the destinations.
1412 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1413 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1414 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1415 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1416 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1417 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1418 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1419 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1421 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1422 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1423 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1424 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1425 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1427 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1428 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
1429 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1430 \indexnofonts
1431 \setupdatafile
1432 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1433 \input \jobname.toc
1434 \endgroup
1437 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1438 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1439 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1440 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1441 \advance\filenamelength by 1
1444 \nextsp}
1445 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1446 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1447 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1448 \else
1449 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1451 % make a live url in pdf output.
1452 \def\pdfurl#1{%
1453 \begingroup
1454 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1455 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1456 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1457 % people have actually reported a problem with.
1459 \normalturnoffactive
1460 \def\@{@}%
1461 \let\/=\empty
1462 \makevalueexpandable
1463 \leavevmode\Red
1464 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1465 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1466 \endgroup}
1467 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1468 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1469 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1470 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1471 \def\maketoks{%
1472 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1473 \ifx\first0\adn0
1474 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1475 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1476 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1477 \else
1478 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1479 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1480 \let\next=\maketoks
1481 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1482 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1484 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1485 \next}
1486 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1487 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1488 \def\pdflink#1{%
1489 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1490 \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1491 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1492 \else
1493 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1494 \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1495 \let\endlink = \relax
1496 \let\linkcolor = \relax
1497 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1498 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1501 \message{fonts,}
1503 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1504 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1505 % italics, not bold italics.
1507 \def\setfontstyle#1{%
1508 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1509 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
1512 % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1514 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1516 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1517 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1518 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1519 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1520 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1522 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1523 % So we set up a \sf.
1524 \newfam\sffam
1525 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1526 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1528 % We don't need math for this font style.
1529 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1532 % Default leading.
1533 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
1535 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1536 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1537 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1539 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1540 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1541 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1543 \def\setleading#1{%
1544 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1545 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1546 \normalbaselines
1547 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1548 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1549 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1554 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1555 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1556 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1557 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1560 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1561 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1562 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1563 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1564 \def\fontprefix{cm}
1566 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1567 \def\rmshape{r}
1568 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
1569 \def\bfshape{b}
1570 \def\bxshape{bx}
1571 \def\ttshape{tt}
1572 \def\ttbshape{tt}
1573 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
1574 \def\itshape{ti}
1575 \def\itbshape{bxti}
1576 \def\slshape{sl}
1577 \def\slbshape{bxsl}
1578 \def\sfshape{ss}
1579 \def\sfbshape{ss}
1580 \def\scshape{csc}
1581 \def\scbshape{csc}
1583 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
1584 % Texinfo.
1586 \def\definetextfontsizexi{
1587 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1588 \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1589 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1590 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1591 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1592 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1593 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1594 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1595 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1596 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1597 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1598 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1599 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1601 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1602 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
1603 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1604 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1605 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1607 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1608 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1609 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1610 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1611 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1612 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1613 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1614 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1615 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1616 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1617 \font\smalli=cmmi9
1618 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1620 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1621 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1622 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1623 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1624 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1625 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1626 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1627 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1628 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1629 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1630 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1631 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1633 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1634 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1635 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1636 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1637 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1638 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1639 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1640 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1641 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1642 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1643 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1644 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1645 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
1646 \def\authortt{\sectt}
1648 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1649 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1650 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1651 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1652 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1653 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1654 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1655 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1656 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
1657 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1658 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1659 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1661 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
1662 \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1663 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1664 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1665 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1666 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1667 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1668 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1669 \let\secbf\secrm
1670 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1671 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1672 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1674 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1675 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1676 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1677 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1678 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1679 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1680 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1681 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1682 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1683 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
1684 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1685 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1687 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1688 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1689 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
1690 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
1691 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
1692 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
1693 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
1694 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
1695 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
1696 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1697 \font\reducedi=cmmi10
1698 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1700 % reset the current fonts
1701 \textfonts
1703 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions
1706 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
1707 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
1708 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
1709 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
1711 \def\definetextfontsizex{%
1712 % Text fonts (10pt).
1713 \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
1714 \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
1715 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1716 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1717 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1718 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1719 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1720 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1721 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1722 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1723 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1724 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1726 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1727 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}
1728 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}
1729 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}
1730 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1732 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1733 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1734 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1735 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1736 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1737 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1738 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1739 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1740 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1741 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1742 \font\smalli=cmmi9
1743 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1745 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1746 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1747 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1748 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1749 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1750 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1751 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1752 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1753 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1754 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1755 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1756 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1758 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1759 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1760 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1761 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1762 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1763 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1764 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1765 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1766 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1767 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1768 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1769 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1770 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
1771 \def\authortt{\sectt}
1773 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
1774 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
1775 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1776 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1777 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1778 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1779 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1780 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1781 \let\chapbf\chaprm
1782 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1783 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1784 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1786 % Section fonts (12pt).
1787 \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
1788 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}
1789 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}
1790 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}
1791 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}
1792 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1793 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}
1794 \let\secbf\secrm
1795 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
1796 \font\seci=cmmi12
1797 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
1799 % Subsection fonts (10pt).
1800 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
1801 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}
1802 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}
1803 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}
1804 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}
1805 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1806 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}
1807 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1808 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}
1809 \font\sseci=cmmi10
1810 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
1812 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
1813 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
1814 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1815 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1816 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1817 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}
1818 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1819 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1820 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}
1821 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1822 \font\reducedi=cmmi9
1823 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
1825 % reduce space between paragraphs
1826 \divide\parskip by 2
1828 % reset the current fonts
1829 \textfonts
1831 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions
1834 % We provide the user-level command
1835 % @fonttextsize 10
1836 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
1838 \def\xword{10}
1839 \def\xiword{11}
1841 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
1842 \def\textsizearg{#1}%
1843 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
1845 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
1846 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
1848 \begingroup \globaldefs=1
1849 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
1850 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
1851 \else
1852 \errhelp=\EMsimple
1853 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
1854 \fi\fi
1855 \endgroup
1859 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1860 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
1861 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1862 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1863 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1865 \def\resetmathfonts{%
1866 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1867 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1868 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1871 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1872 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
1873 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
1874 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
1876 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
1877 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
1878 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
1880 % This all needs generalizing, badly.
1882 \def\textfonts{%
1883 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1884 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1885 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
1886 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1887 \def\curfontsize{text}%
1888 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1889 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1890 \def\titlefonts{%
1891 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1892 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1893 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1894 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1895 \def\curfontsize{title}%
1896 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
1897 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1898 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1899 \def\chapfonts{%
1900 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1901 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1902 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
1903 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1904 \def\curfontsize{chap}%
1905 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
1906 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1907 \def\secfonts{%
1908 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1909 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1910 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
1911 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1912 \def\curfontsize{sec}%
1913 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
1914 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1915 \def\subsecfonts{%
1916 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1917 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1918 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
1919 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1920 \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
1921 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
1922 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1923 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
1924 \def\reducedfonts{%
1925 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
1926 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
1927 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
1928 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
1929 \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
1930 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1931 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1932 \def\smallfonts{%
1933 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1934 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1935 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1936 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1937 \def\curfontsize{small}%
1938 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1939 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1940 \def\smallerfonts{%
1941 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1942 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1943 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1944 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1945 \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
1946 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1947 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1949 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
1950 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
1952 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
1953 % can fit this many characters:
1954 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
1955 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
1956 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
1957 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
1958 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
1960 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
1961 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
1963 % I wish the USA used A4 paper.
1964 % --karl, 24jan03.
1967 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1969 \definetextfontsizexi
1971 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1972 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1973 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1975 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1976 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1978 % Fonts for short table of contents.
1979 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1980 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12
1981 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1982 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1984 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1985 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1987 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1988 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1989 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
1990 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
1991 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1992 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1994 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
1995 % @var is set to this for defun arguments.
1996 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1998 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
1999 % ttsl for book titles, do we?
2000 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2002 \let\i=\smartitalic
2003 \let\slanted=\smartslanted
2004 \let\var=\smartslanted
2005 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
2006 \let\emph=\smartitalic
2008 % @b, explicit bold.
2009 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2010 \let\strong=\b
2012 % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2013 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2015 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2016 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2017 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2019 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2020 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2022 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2023 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2024 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2026 \catcode`@=11
2027 \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2028 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2029 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2030 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2032 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2033 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2034 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2035 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2037 \catcode`@=\other
2038 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2040 \def\t#1{%
2041 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2042 \null
2044 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
2045 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
2046 \font\keysy=cmsy9
2047 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2048 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2049 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2050 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2051 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2052 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2053 \def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
2054 % The old definition, with no lozenge:
2055 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
2056 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2058 % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
2059 \let\file=\samp
2060 \let\option=\samp
2062 % @code is a modification of @t,
2063 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
2064 \def\tclose#1{%
2066 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2067 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2069 % Switch to typewriter.
2072 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2073 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2075 % Turn off hyphenation.
2076 \nohyphenation
2078 \rawbackslash
2079 \plainfrenchspacing
2082 \null
2085 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2086 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2087 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2089 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2090 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2091 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2092 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
2093 % -- rms.
2095 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2096 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2098 \global\def\code{\begingroup
2099 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active
2100 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft
2102 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
2103 \ifallowcodebreaks
2104 \let-\codedash
2105 \let_\codeunder
2106 \else
2107 \let-\realdash
2108 \let_\realunder
2110 \codex
2114 \def\realdash{-}
2115 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2116 \def\codeunder{%
2117 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2118 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2119 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2120 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2121 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2122 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2123 \else\normalunderscore \fi
2124 \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2125 {\_}%
2127 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2129 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2130 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
2131 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
2132 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
2134 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2136 \def\keywordtrue{true}
2137 \def\keywordfalse{false}
2139 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2140 \def\txiarg{#1}%
2141 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2142 \allowcodebreakstrue
2143 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2144 \allowcodebreaksfalse
2145 \else
2146 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2147 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
2148 \fi\fi
2151 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2152 % then @kbd has no effect.
2154 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2155 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2156 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2157 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2158 \def\txiarg{#1}%
2159 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2160 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2161 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2162 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2163 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2164 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2165 \else
2166 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2167 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
2168 \fi\fi\fi
2170 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
2171 \def\wordexample{example}
2172 \def\wordcode{code}
2174 % Default is `distinct.'
2175 \kbdinputstyle distinct
2177 \def\xkey{\key}
2178 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2179 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2180 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
2181 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
2183 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
2184 \let\indicateurl=\code
2185 \let\env=\code
2186 \let\command=\code
2188 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2189 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2190 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2191 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
2192 % a hypertex \special here.
2194 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
2195 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2196 \unsepspaces
2197 \pdfurl{#1}%
2198 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2199 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2200 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2201 \else
2202 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2203 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2204 \ifpdf
2205 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2206 \else
2207 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2209 \else
2210 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2213 \endlink
2214 \endgroup}
2216 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2218 \let\url=\uref
2220 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2221 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2223 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2224 \ifpdf
2225 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2226 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2227 \unsepspaces
2228 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2229 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2230 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2231 \endlink
2232 \endgroup}
2233 \else
2234 \let\email=\uref
2237 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2238 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2239 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2240 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
2242 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2244 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
2245 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2247 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2249 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
2251 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2252 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
2253 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
2254 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2256 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2257 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
2258 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2259 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2261 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2262 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2263 % all-uppercase.
2265 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2266 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2267 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2268 \def\temp{#2}%
2269 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2270 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2274 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2275 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2277 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2278 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2279 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2280 \def\temp{#2}%
2281 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2282 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2286 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
2288 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
2290 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
2291 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
2292 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
2293 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
2294 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
2296 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
2297 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
2298 % font height.
2300 % feymr - regular
2301 % feymo - slanted
2302 % feybr - bold
2303 % feybo - bold slanted
2305 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
2306 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
2307 % Hmm.
2309 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
2310 % Hope not.
2313 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
2314 \def\eurofont{%
2315 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
2316 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
2317 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
2318 % font installed.
2320 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
2321 % that to the current nominal size.
2323 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
2324 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
2326 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2328 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2329 % bold:
2330 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
2331 \else
2332 % regular:
2333 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
2335 \thiseurofont
2338 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
2339 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
2340 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
2342 \def\registeredsymbol{%
2343 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
2344 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
2348 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
2350 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
2352 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
2353 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
2354 % so we'll define it if necessary.
2356 \ifx\Orb\undefined
2357 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
2361 \message{page headings,}
2363 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
2364 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
2366 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
2367 \newif\ifseenauthor
2368 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
2370 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
2371 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
2373 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2374 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2375 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2376 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2378 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
2379 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
2381 \envdef\titlepage{%
2382 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
2383 \begingroup
2384 \parindent=0pt \textfonts
2385 % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
2386 \vglue\titlepagetopglue
2387 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
2388 \finishedtitlepagetrue
2390 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
2391 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
2392 \let\oldpage = \page
2393 \def\page{%
2394 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2395 \finishtitlepage
2397 \let\page = \oldpage
2398 \page
2399 \null
2403 \def\Etitlepage{%
2404 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2405 \finishtitlepage
2407 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
2408 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
2409 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
2410 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
2411 \oldpage
2412 \endgroup
2414 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
2415 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
2416 \HEADINGSon
2418 % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
2419 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2420 \shortcontents
2421 \contents
2422 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2423 \global\let\contents = \relax
2426 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2427 \contents
2428 \global\let\contents = \relax
2429 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2433 \def\finishtitlepage{%
2434 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
2435 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
2436 \finishedtitlepagetrue
2439 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
2441 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
2442 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
2444 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
2445 \let\tt=\authortt}
2447 \parseargdef\title{%
2448 \checkenv\titlepage
2449 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
2450 % print a rule at the page bottom also.
2451 \finishedtitlepagefalse
2452 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
2455 \parseargdef\subtitle{%
2456 \checkenv\titlepage
2457 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
2460 % @author should come last, but may come many times.
2461 % It can also be used inside @quotation.
2463 \parseargdef\author{%
2464 \def\temp{\quotation}%
2465 \ifx\thisenv\temp
2466 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
2467 \else
2468 \checkenv\titlepage
2469 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
2470 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
2475 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
2477 \let\thispage=\folio
2479 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
2480 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
2481 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
2482 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
2484 % Now make TeX use those variables
2485 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
2486 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
2487 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
2488 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
2489 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
2491 % Commands to set those variables.
2492 % For example, this is what @headings on does
2493 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
2494 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
2495 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
2496 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2499 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
2500 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2501 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2502 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2504 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
2505 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2506 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2507 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2509 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2511 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
2512 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2513 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2514 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2516 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
2517 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2518 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2519 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
2521 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
2522 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
2523 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
2524 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
2527 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2530 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
2531 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
2532 % @headings off turns them off.
2533 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
2534 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2535 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2536 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
2537 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
2538 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
2540 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2542 \def\HEADINGSoff{%
2543 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2544 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
2545 \HEADINGSoff
2546 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
2547 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
2548 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
2549 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
2550 % edge of all pages.
2551 \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2552 \global\pageno=1
2553 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2554 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2555 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2556 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2557 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2559 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2561 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
2562 % page number on top right.
2563 \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2564 \global\pageno=1
2565 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2566 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2567 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2568 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2569 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2571 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
2573 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
2574 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
2575 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
2576 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2577 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2578 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2579 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2580 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2583 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
2584 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
2585 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2586 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2587 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2588 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2589 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2592 % Subroutines used in generating headings
2593 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
2594 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
2595 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
2596 \ifx\today\undefined
2597 \def\today{%
2598 \number\day\space
2599 \ifcase\month
2600 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
2601 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
2602 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
2604 \space\number\year}
2607 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
2608 % It generates no output of its own.
2609 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
2610 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2613 \message{tables,}
2614 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2616 % default indentation of table text
2617 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
2618 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
2619 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
2620 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
2621 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
2623 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
2624 \newdimen\itemmax
2626 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2627 % these defs.
2628 % They also define \itemindex
2629 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
2631 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
2633 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
2635 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
2636 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
2638 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
2639 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
2640 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2641 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2642 \itemindex{#1}%
2643 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
2645 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
2646 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
2647 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
2648 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
2649 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
2650 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
2652 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
2653 % but leave it ragged-right.
2654 \begingroup
2655 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
2656 \advance\hsize by\tableindent
2657 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
2658 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
2659 \endgroup
2661 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
2662 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
2663 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
2665 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
2666 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
2667 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
2668 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
2669 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
2670 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
2672 \penalty 10001
2673 \endgroup
2674 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
2675 \else
2676 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
2677 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2678 \noindent
2679 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
2680 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
2681 % eventually be printed.
2682 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
2683 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
2684 \unhbox0
2685 \nobreak\kern\dimen0
2686 \endgroup
2687 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
2691 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
2692 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2694 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2695 \envdef\table{%
2696 \let\itemindex\gobble
2697 \tablecheck{table}%
2699 \envdef\ftable{%
2700 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2701 \tablecheck{ftable}%
2703 \envdef\vtable{%
2704 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2705 \tablecheck{vtable}%
2707 \def\tablecheck#1{%
2708 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
2709 \endgroup
2710 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
2711 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
2712 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
2713 \else
2714 \let\next\tablex
2716 \next
2718 \def\tablex#1{%
2719 \def\itemindicate{#1}%
2720 \parsearg\tabley
2722 \def\tabley#1{%
2724 \makevalueexpandable
2725 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
2726 \expandafter
2727 }\temp \endtablez
2729 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
2730 \aboveenvbreak
2731 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
2732 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
2733 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
2734 \itemmax=\tableindent
2735 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
2736 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
2737 \exdentamount=\tableindent
2738 \parindent = 0pt
2739 \parskip = \smallskipamount
2740 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2741 \let\item = \internalBitem
2742 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
2744 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
2745 \let\Eftable\Etable
2746 \let\Evtable\Etable
2747 \let\Eitemize\Etable
2748 \let\Eenumerate\Etable
2750 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
2752 \newcount \itemno
2754 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2756 \def\doitemize#1{%
2757 \aboveenvbreak
2758 \itemmax=\itemindent
2759 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
2760 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
2761 \exdentamount=\itemindent
2762 \parindent=0pt
2763 \parskip=\smallskipamount
2764 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2765 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
2766 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
2767 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
2768 \let\item=\itemizeitem
2771 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
2773 \def\itemizeitem{%
2774 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
2775 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
2777 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
2778 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
2779 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
2780 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
2781 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
2782 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
2783 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
2784 % that's the theory.
2785 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
2786 \noindent
2787 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
2788 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
2789 \flushcr
2792 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
2793 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
2795 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
2797 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
2798 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
2799 % argument is the same as `1'.
2801 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
2802 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2803 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2804 \def\thearg{#1}%
2805 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2807 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
2808 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2809 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2810 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2811 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2812 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2813 \ifx\rest\empty
2814 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
2815 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2816 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2817 % not equal to itself.
2818 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2820 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2821 % continuing to look for a <number>.
2823 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2824 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2825 \else
2826 % It's a letter.
2827 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2828 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2829 \else
2830 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2833 \else
2834 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
2835 \numericenumerate
2839 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
2840 % given in \thearg.
2842 \def\numericenumerate{%
2843 \itemno = \thearg
2844 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2847 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2848 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2849 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2850 \startenumeration{%
2851 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2852 \ifnum\itemno=0
2853 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2854 alphabet}%
2856 \char\lccode\itemno
2860 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2861 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2862 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2863 \startenumeration{%
2864 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2865 \ifnum\itemno=0
2866 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2867 alphabet}
2869 \char\uccode\itemno
2873 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2874 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
2875 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2877 \def\startenumeration#1{%
2878 \advance\itemno by -1
2879 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2882 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2883 % to @enumerate.
2885 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2886 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2887 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2888 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2891 % @multitable macros
2892 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2894 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2895 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
2896 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2897 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2899 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2901 % To make preamble:
2903 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2904 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2905 % @item ...
2907 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2908 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2909 % columns as desired.
2912 % Or use a template:
2913 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2914 % @item ...
2915 % using the widest term desired in each column.
2917 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2918 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2919 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2920 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2922 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
2923 % if they are.
2925 % Sample multitable:
2927 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2928 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2929 % @item
2930 % first col stuff
2931 % @tab
2932 % second col stuff
2933 % @tab
2934 % third col
2935 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2936 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2938 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2939 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2940 % @end multitable
2942 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2943 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2944 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2945 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2946 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2947 % to baseline.
2948 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2950 \newskip\multitableparskip
2951 \newskip\multitableparindent
2952 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
2953 \newskip\multitablelinespace
2954 \multitableparskip=0pt
2955 \multitableparindent=6pt
2956 \multitablecolspace=12pt
2957 \multitablelinespace=0pt
2959 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2961 \let\endsetuptable\relax
2962 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2963 \let\columnfractions\relax
2964 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2965 \newif\ifsetpercent
2967 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
2968 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
2970 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2971 \global\advance\colcount by 1
2972 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2973 \setuptable
2976 \newcount\colcount
2977 \def\setuptable#1{%
2978 \def\firstarg{#1}%
2979 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2980 \let\go = \relax
2981 \else
2982 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2983 \global\setpercenttrue
2984 \else
2985 \ifsetpercent
2986 \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2987 \else
2988 \global\advance\colcount by 1
2989 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
2990 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2991 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2994 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2995 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2996 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2997 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2998 \else
2999 \let\go = \setuptable
3000 \fi%
3005 % multitable-only commands.
3007 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3008 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3009 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
3010 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
3012 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
3013 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
3014 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
3015 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3016 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3018 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3020 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
3022 \envdef\multitable{%
3023 \vskip\parskip
3024 \startsavinginserts
3026 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3027 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3028 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3029 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3030 \def\item{\crcr}%
3032 \tolerance=9500
3033 \hbadness=9500
3034 \setmultitablespacing
3035 \parskip=\multitableparskip
3036 \parindent=\multitableparindent
3037 \overfullrule=0pt
3038 \global\colcount=0
3040 \everycr = {%
3041 \noalign{%
3042 \global\everytab={}%
3043 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3044 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3045 \checkinserts
3046 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3047 %\filbreak
3048 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3049 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
3050 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3054 \parsearg\domultitable
3056 \def\domultitable#1{%
3057 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
3058 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
3060 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
3061 % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
3062 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
3063 % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
3064 \halign\bgroup &%
3065 \global\advance\colcount by 1
3066 \multistrut
3067 \vtop{%
3068 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
3069 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
3071 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
3072 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
3073 % the first one.
3075 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
3076 % to the width of each template entry.
3078 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
3079 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
3080 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
3081 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
3083 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
3084 \rightskip=0pt
3085 \ifnum\colcount=1
3086 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
3087 \advance\hsize by\leftskip
3088 \else
3089 \ifsetpercent \else
3090 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
3091 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
3092 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
3094 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
3095 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
3097 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
3098 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
3099 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
3100 % For example:
3101 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
3102 % @item @code{#}
3103 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
3104 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
3105 % marking characters.
3106 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
3107 }\cr
3109 \def\Emultitable{%
3110 \crcr
3111 \egroup % end the \halign
3112 \global\setpercentfalse
3115 \def\setmultitablespacing{%
3116 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
3118 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
3119 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
3120 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
3121 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
3122 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
3123 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
3124 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
3126 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
3127 %% table. If not, do nothing.
3128 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
3129 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
3130 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
3131 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
3132 %% than skip between lines in the table.
3133 \fi%
3134 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
3135 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
3136 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
3137 %% than skip between lines in the table.
3138 \fi}
3141 \message{conditionals,}
3143 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
3144 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
3145 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
3146 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
3147 % attempt to close an environment group.
3149 \def\makecond#1{%
3150 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
3151 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
3153 \makecond{iftex}
3154 \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
3155 \makecond{ifnothtml}
3156 \makecond{ifnotinfo}
3157 \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
3158 \makecond{ifnotxml}
3160 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
3162 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
3163 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
3164 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
3165 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
3166 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
3167 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
3168 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
3169 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
3170 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
3171 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
3172 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
3173 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
3174 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
3176 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
3178 % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
3179 \newcount\doignorecount
3181 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
3182 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
3183 \obeylines
3184 \catcode`\@ = \other
3185 \catcode`\{ = \other
3186 \catcode`\} = \other
3188 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
3189 \spaceisspace
3191 % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
3192 \doignorecount = 0
3194 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
3195 \dodoignore{#1}%
3198 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
3199 \obeylines %
3201 \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
3202 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
3204 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
3205 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
3206 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
3208 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
3209 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
3210 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
3211 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
3213 % And now expand that command.
3214 \doignoretext ^^M%
3218 \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
3219 \def\temp{#1}%
3220 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
3221 \let\next\doignoretextzzz
3222 \else % Found a nested condition, ...
3223 \advance\doignorecount by 1
3224 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
3225 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
3227 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
3230 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
3232 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
3233 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
3234 \let\next\enddoignore
3235 \else % Still inside a nested condition.
3236 \advance\doignorecount by -1
3237 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
3239 \next
3242 % Finish off ignored text.
3243 { \obeylines%
3244 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
3245 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
3246 % would result in a blank line in the output.
3247 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
3251 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
3252 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
3254 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
3255 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
3256 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
3257 % didn't need it.
3258 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
3260 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
3261 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
3263 \makevalueexpandable
3264 \def\temp{#2}%
3265 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
3266 \ifx\temp\empty
3267 \next{}%
3268 \else
3269 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
3273 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
3274 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
3276 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
3278 \parseargdef\clear{%
3280 \makevalueexpandable
3281 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
3285 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
3286 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
3287 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
3289 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
3291 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
3292 \let\value = \expandablevalue
3293 % We don't want these characters active, ...
3294 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
3295 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
3296 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
3297 % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
3298 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
3302 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
3303 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
3304 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
3305 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
3306 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
3307 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
3308 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
3310 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
3311 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
3312 {[No value for ``#1'']}%
3313 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
3314 \else
3315 \csname SET#1\endcsname
3319 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
3320 % with @set.
3322 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
3324 \makecond{ifset}
3325 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
3326 \def\doifset#1#2{%
3328 \makevalueexpandable
3329 \let\next=\empty
3330 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
3331 #1% If not set, redefine \next.
3333 \expandafter
3334 }\next
3336 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
3338 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
3339 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
3341 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
3342 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
3343 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
3345 \makecond{ifclear}
3346 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
3347 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
3349 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
3350 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
3351 \let\dircategory=\comment
3353 % @defininfoenclose.
3354 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
3357 \message{indexing,}
3358 % Index generation facilities
3360 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
3361 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
3362 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
3364 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
3365 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
3366 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
3367 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
3368 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
3369 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
3370 % for the sake of vms.
3372 \def\newindex#1{%
3373 \iflinks
3374 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3375 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
3377 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
3378 \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
3381 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
3383 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
3385 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
3387 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
3389 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
3390 \iflinks
3391 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3392 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
3394 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
3395 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
3399 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
3400 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
3402 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
3403 % inside @code.
3405 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
3406 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
3408 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
3409 % #3 the target index (bar).
3410 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
3411 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
3412 % closing the target index.
3413 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
3414 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
3415 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
3416 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
3417 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
3419 % redefine \fooindfile:
3420 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
3421 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
3422 % redefine \fooindex:
3423 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
3426 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
3427 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
3428 % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
3430 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
3431 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
3433 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
3434 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
3436 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
3437 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
3439 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
3440 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
3441 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
3443 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
3444 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
3445 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
3447 \def\indexdummies{%
3448 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
3449 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
3450 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
3452 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
3453 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
3454 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
3455 \let\{ = \mylbrace
3456 \let\} = \myrbrace
3458 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
3459 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
3460 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
3461 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
3462 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
3463 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
3464 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
3465 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
3466 % is still getting written without apparent harm.
3468 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
3469 % help-texinfo, 22may06):
3470 % @macro funindex {WORD}
3471 % @findex xyz
3472 % @end macro
3473 % ...
3474 % @funindex commtest
3476 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
3478 % Sample whatsit resulting:
3479 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
3481 % So:
3482 \let\endinput = \empty
3484 % Do the redefinitions.
3485 \commondummies
3488 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
3489 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
3490 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
3491 % this will be simpler.
3493 \def\atdummies{%
3494 \def\@{@@}%
3495 \def\ {@ }%
3496 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
3497 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
3499 % Do the redefinitions.
3500 \commondummies
3501 \otherbackslash
3504 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
3506 \def\commondummies{%
3508 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
3509 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
3510 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
3511 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
3512 % from whatever follows.
3514 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
3515 % space.
3517 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
3518 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
3519 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
3521 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
3522 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
3523 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3525 \commondummiesnofonts
3527 \definedummyletter\_%
3529 % Non-English letters.
3530 \definedummyword\AA
3531 \definedummyword\AE
3532 \definedummyword\L
3533 \definedummyword\OE
3534 \definedummyword\O
3535 \definedummyword\aa
3536 \definedummyword\ae
3537 \definedummyword\l
3538 \definedummyword\oe
3539 \definedummyword\o
3540 \definedummyword\ss
3541 \definedummyword\exclamdown
3542 \definedummyword\questiondown
3543 \definedummyword\ordf
3544 \definedummyword\ordm
3546 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
3547 \definedummyword\bf
3548 \definedummyword\gtr
3549 \definedummyword\hat
3550 \definedummyword\less
3551 \definedummyword\sf
3552 \definedummyword\sl
3553 \definedummyword\tclose
3554 \definedummyword\tt
3556 \definedummyword\LaTeX
3557 \definedummyword\TeX
3559 % Assorted special characters.
3560 \definedummyword\bullet
3561 \definedummyword\comma
3562 \definedummyword\copyright
3563 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
3564 \definedummyword\dots
3565 \definedummyword\enddots
3566 \definedummyword\equiv
3567 \definedummyword\error
3568 \definedummyword\euro
3569 \definedummyword\expansion
3570 \definedummyword\minus
3571 \definedummyword\pounds
3572 \definedummyword\point
3573 \definedummyword\print
3574 \definedummyword\result
3575 \definedummyword\textdegree
3577 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
3578 \macrolist
3580 \normalturnoffactive
3582 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
3583 % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
3584 \makevalueexpandable
3587 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
3589 \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
3590 % Control letters and accents.
3591 \definedummyletter\!%
3592 \definedummyaccent\"%
3593 \definedummyaccent\'%
3594 \definedummyletter\*%
3595 \definedummyaccent\,%
3596 \definedummyletter\.%
3597 \definedummyletter\/%
3598 \definedummyletter\:%
3599 \definedummyaccent\=%
3600 \definedummyletter\?%
3601 \definedummyaccent\^%
3602 \definedummyaccent\`%
3603 \definedummyaccent\~%
3604 \definedummyword\u
3605 \definedummyword\v
3606 \definedummyword\H
3607 \definedummyword\dotaccent
3608 \definedummyword\ringaccent
3609 \definedummyword\tieaccent
3610 \definedummyword\ubaraccent
3611 \definedummyword\udotaccent
3612 \definedummyword\dotless
3614 % Texinfo font commands.
3615 \definedummyword\b
3616 \definedummyword\i
3617 \definedummyword\r
3618 \definedummyword\sc
3619 \definedummyword\t
3621 % Commands that take arguments.
3622 \definedummyword\acronym
3623 \definedummyword\cite
3624 \definedummyword\code
3625 \definedummyword\command
3626 \definedummyword\dfn
3627 \definedummyword\emph
3628 \definedummyword\env
3629 \definedummyword\file
3630 \definedummyword\kbd
3631 \definedummyword\key
3632 \definedummyword\math
3633 \definedummyword\option
3634 \definedummyword\pxref
3635 \definedummyword\ref
3636 \definedummyword\samp
3637 \definedummyword\strong
3638 \definedummyword\tie
3639 \definedummyword\uref
3640 \definedummyword\url
3641 \definedummyword\var
3642 \definedummyword\verb
3643 \definedummyword\w
3644 \definedummyword\xref
3647 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
3648 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
3649 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
3650 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
3652 \def\indexnofonts{%
3653 % Accent commands should become @asis.
3654 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
3655 % We can just ignore other control letters.
3656 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
3657 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
3658 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
3660 \commondummiesnofonts
3662 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
3663 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
3664 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
3665 %\let\tt=\asis
3667 \def\ { }%
3668 \def\@{@}%
3669 % how to handle braces?
3670 \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
3672 % Non-English letters.
3673 \def\AA{AA}%
3674 \def\AE{AE}%
3675 \def\L{L}%
3676 \def\OE{OE}%
3677 \def\O{O}%
3678 \def\aa{aa}%
3679 \def\ae{ae}%
3680 \def\l{l}%
3681 \def\oe{oe}%
3682 \def\o{o}%
3683 \def\ss{ss}%
3684 \def\exclamdown{!}%
3685 \def\questiondown{?}%
3686 \def\ordf{a}%
3687 \def\ordm{o}%
3689 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
3690 \def\TeX{TeX}%
3692 % Assorted special characters.
3693 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
3694 \def\bullet{bullet}%
3695 \def\comma{,}%
3696 \def\copyright{copyright}%
3697 \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
3698 \def\dots{...}%
3699 \def\enddots{...}%
3700 \def\equiv{==}%
3701 \def\error{error}%
3702 \def\euro{euro}%
3703 \def\expansion{==>}%
3704 \def\minus{-}%
3705 \def\pounds{pounds}%
3706 \def\point{.}%
3707 \def\print{-|}%
3708 \def\result{=>}%
3709 \def\textdegree{degrees}%
3711 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
3712 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
3713 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
3714 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
3715 % that starts with \.
3717 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
3718 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
3719 % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
3721 \macrolist
3724 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
3725 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
3727 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
3728 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
3729 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
3731 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
3732 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
3733 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
3734 % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
3736 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
3737 \iflinks
3739 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
3740 \toks0 = {#2}%
3741 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
3742 \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3743 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
3744 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
3747 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
3749 \ifvmode
3750 \dosubindsanitize
3751 \else
3752 \dosubindwrite
3758 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
3760 \def\dosubindwrite{%
3761 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
3762 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
3763 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
3766 % Remember, we are within a group.
3767 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
3768 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
3769 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3771 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
3772 % get the string to sort by.
3773 {\indexnofonts
3774 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
3775 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
3778 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3779 % the original text, including any font commands. We write
3780 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3781 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3782 % sorted result.
3783 \edef\temp{%
3784 \write\writeto{%
3785 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3787 \temp
3790 % Take care of unwanted page breaks:
3792 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3793 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3794 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3795 % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
3796 % like this:
3797 % @end defun
3798 % @tindex whatever
3799 % @defun ...
3800 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3801 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3802 % the previous defun.
3804 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
3805 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3807 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3809 % But wait, there is a catch there:
3810 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
3811 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
3812 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
3813 % representation of the skip.
3815 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
3816 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
3818 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
3820 % ..., ready, GO:
3822 \def\dosubindsanitize{%
3823 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
3824 \skip0 = \lastskip
3825 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
3826 \count255 = \lastpenalty
3828 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
3829 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
3830 % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
3831 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
3832 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
3833 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3834 \else
3835 \vskip-\skip0
3838 \dosubindwrite
3840 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3841 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
3842 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
3843 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
3844 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
3845 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
3847 % @deffn deffn-whatever
3848 % @vindex index-whatever
3849 % Description.
3850 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
3851 % and the "Description." paragraph.
3852 \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
3853 \else
3854 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
3855 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
3856 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
3857 \nobreak\vskip\skip0
3861 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3862 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3863 % or
3864 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3865 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3866 % containing these kinds of lines:
3867 % \initial {c}
3868 % before the first topic whose initial is c
3869 % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3870 % for a topic that is used without subtopics
3871 % \primary {topic}
3872 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3873 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3874 % for each subtopic.
3876 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3877 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3879 \def\findex {\fnindex}
3880 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
3881 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
3882 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
3883 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
3884 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
3886 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3887 {\obeylines %
3888 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3889 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3891 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3893 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3894 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3896 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
3897 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3899 \smallfonts \rm
3900 \tolerance = 9500
3901 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
3903 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3904 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3905 % \initial {@}
3906 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3907 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3908 \catcode`\@ = 11
3909 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3910 \ifeof 1
3911 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3912 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3913 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3914 % there is some text.
3915 \putwordIndexNonexistent
3916 \else
3918 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3919 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3920 % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3921 \read 1 to \temp
3922 \ifeof 1
3923 \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3924 \else
3925 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3926 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3927 % to make right now.
3928 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
3929 \catcode`\\ = 0
3930 \escapechar = `\\
3931 \begindoublecolumns
3932 \input \jobname.#1s
3933 \enddoublecolumns
3936 \closein 1
3937 \endgroup}
3939 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3940 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3942 \def\initial#1{{%
3943 % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3944 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3946 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3947 \removelastskip
3949 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3950 \nobreak
3951 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
3952 \penalty 0
3953 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
3955 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
3956 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3957 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3958 % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3960 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3961 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3962 \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3963 % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3964 \nobreak
3965 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3968 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
3969 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
3970 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3972 % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
3973 % \def\entry#1#2{...
3974 % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
3975 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
3976 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
3978 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
3979 % --kasal, 21nov03
3980 \def\entry{%
3981 \begingroup
3983 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3984 % affect previous text.
3985 \par
3987 % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3988 \parfillskip = 0in
3990 % No extra space above this paragraph.
3991 \parskip = 0in
3993 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3994 \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3996 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3997 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
3998 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
3999 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
4000 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
4002 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
4003 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
4004 \hangindent = 2em
4006 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
4007 % with blank space.
4008 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
4010 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
4011 % columns.
4012 \vskip 0pt plus1pt
4014 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
4015 \afterassignment\doentry
4016 \let\temp =
4018 \def\doentry{%
4019 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
4020 \noindent
4021 \aftergroup\finishentry
4022 % And now comes the text of the entry.
4024 \def\finishentry#1{%
4025 % #1 is the page number.
4027 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
4028 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
4029 % cursed by a Unix daemon.
4030 \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
4031 \def\tempb{#1}%
4032 \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
4033 \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
4034 \ifx\tempc\tempd
4036 \else
4038 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
4039 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
4040 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
4041 \hfil\penalty50
4042 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
4044 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
4045 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
4046 % \hbox ensues.
4047 \ifpdf
4048 \pdfgettoks#1.%
4049 \ \the\toksA
4050 \else
4051 \ #1%
4054 \par
4055 \endgroup
4058 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
4059 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
4060 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
4062 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
4064 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
4065 \def\secondary#1#2{{%
4066 \parfillskip=0in
4067 \parskip=0in
4068 \hangindent=1in
4069 \hangafter=1
4070 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
4071 \ifpdf
4072 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
4073 \else
4076 \par
4079 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
4080 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
4081 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
4082 \catcode`\@=11
4084 \newbox\partialpage
4085 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
4087 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
4088 % Grab any single-column material above us.
4089 \output = {%
4091 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
4092 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
4093 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
4094 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
4095 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
4096 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
4097 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
4098 \ifvoid\partialpage \else
4099 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
4102 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
4103 % Unvbox the main output page.
4104 \unvbox\PAGE
4105 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
4108 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
4110 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
4111 \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
4113 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
4114 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
4115 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
4116 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
4117 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
4119 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
4120 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
4121 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
4122 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
4123 % as it did when we hard-coded it.
4125 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
4126 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
4127 % been clobbered.
4129 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
4130 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
4131 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
4132 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
4134 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
4135 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
4136 \vsize = 2\vsize
4139 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
4140 % the last.
4142 \def\doublecolumnout{%
4143 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
4144 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
4145 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
4146 % previous page.
4147 \dimen@ = \vsize
4148 \divide\dimen@ by 2
4149 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
4151 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
4152 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
4153 \onepageout\pagesofar
4154 \unvbox255
4155 \penalty\outputpenalty
4158 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
4159 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
4160 \def\pagesofar{%
4161 \unvbox\partialpage
4163 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
4164 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
4165 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
4168 % All done with double columns.
4169 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
4170 \output = {%
4171 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
4172 % current page, no automatic page break.
4173 \balancecolumns
4175 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
4176 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
4177 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
4178 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
4179 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
4180 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
4181 % the output somewhat more palatable.)
4182 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
4184 \eject
4185 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
4187 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
4188 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
4189 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
4190 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
4191 \pagegoal = \vsize
4194 % Called at the end of the double column material.
4195 \def\balancecolumns{%
4196 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
4197 \dimen@ = \ht0
4198 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
4199 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
4200 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
4201 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
4202 \splittopskip = \topskip
4203 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
4205 \vbadness = 10000
4206 \loop
4207 \global\setbox3 = \copy0
4208 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
4209 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
4210 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
4211 \repeat
4213 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
4214 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
4215 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
4217 \pagesofar
4219 \catcode`\@ = \other
4222 \message{sectioning,}
4223 % Chapters, sections, etc.
4225 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
4226 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
4227 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
4228 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
4229 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
4230 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
4231 \newcount\chapno
4232 \newcount\secno \secno=0
4233 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
4234 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
4236 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
4237 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
4239 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
4240 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
4241 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
4242 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
4244 \def\appendixletter{%
4245 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
4246 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
4247 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
4248 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
4249 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
4250 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
4251 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
4252 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
4253 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
4254 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
4255 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
4256 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
4257 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
4258 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
4259 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
4260 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
4261 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
4262 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
4263 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
4264 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
4265 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
4266 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
4267 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
4268 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
4269 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
4270 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
4271 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
4272 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
4273 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
4274 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
4275 \else\char\the\appendixno
4276 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
4277 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
4279 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
4280 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
4281 % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
4282 \def\thischapter{}
4283 \def\thissection{}
4285 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
4286 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
4288 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
4289 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
4290 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
4292 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
4293 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
4294 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
4296 % we only have subsub.
4297 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
4299 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
4300 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
4301 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
4303 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
4304 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
4305 \def\chapheadtype{N}
4307 % Choose a heading macro
4308 % #1 is heading type
4309 % #2 is heading level
4310 % #3 is text for heading
4311 \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
4312 % Compute the abs. sec. level:
4313 \absseclevel=#2
4314 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
4315 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
4316 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
4317 \absseclevel = 0
4318 \else
4319 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
4320 \absseclevel = 3
4323 % The heading type:
4324 \def\headtype{#1}%
4325 \if \headtype U%
4326 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
4327 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
4329 \else
4330 % Check for appendix sections:
4331 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
4332 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
4333 \else
4334 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
4335 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
4336 \fi\fi
4338 % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
4339 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
4340 \def\headtype{U}%
4341 \else
4342 \chardef\unmlevel = 3
4345 % Now print the heading:
4346 \if \headtype U%
4347 \ifcase\absseclevel
4348 \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
4349 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
4350 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4351 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4353 \else
4354 \if \headtype A%
4355 \ifcase\absseclevel
4356 \appendixzzz{#3}%
4357 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
4358 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
4359 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4361 \else
4362 \ifcase\absseclevel
4363 \chapterzzz{#3}%
4364 \or \seczzz{#3}%
4365 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4366 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4370 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4373 % an interface:
4374 \def\numhead{\genhead N}
4375 \def\apphead{\genhead A}
4376 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
4378 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
4379 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
4381 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
4382 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
4383 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4385 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
4386 \def\chapterzzz#1{%
4387 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
4388 % as an @include file.
4389 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4390 \global\advance\chapno by 1
4392 % Used for \float.
4393 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
4394 \resetallfloatnos
4396 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
4398 % Write the actual heading.
4399 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
4401 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
4402 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
4403 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4404 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4407 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
4408 \def\appendixzzz#1{%
4409 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4410 \global\advance\appendixno by 1
4411 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
4412 \resetallfloatnos
4414 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
4415 \message{\appendixnum}%
4417 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
4419 \global\let\section = \appendixsec
4420 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
4421 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
4424 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
4425 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
4426 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4427 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
4429 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
4430 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4431 \resetallfloatnos
4433 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
4434 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
4435 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
4436 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
4437 % to be executed, not expanded).
4439 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
4440 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
4441 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
4442 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
4443 % the toc entries.)
4444 \toks0 = {#1}%
4445 \message{(\the\toks0)}%
4447 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
4449 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
4450 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
4451 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
4454 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
4455 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
4456 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
4457 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
4458 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
4459 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
4460 \unnmhead0{#1}%
4461 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4464 % @top is like @unnumbered.
4465 \let\top\unnumbered
4467 % Sections.
4468 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
4469 \def\seczzz#1{%
4470 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
4471 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
4474 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
4475 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
4476 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
4477 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
4479 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
4481 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
4482 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
4483 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
4484 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
4487 % Subsections.
4488 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
4489 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
4490 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4491 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4494 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
4495 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
4496 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4497 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
4498 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4501 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
4502 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
4503 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4504 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
4505 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4508 % Subsubsections.
4509 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
4510 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4511 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4512 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
4513 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4516 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
4517 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
4518 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4519 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
4520 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4523 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
4524 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4525 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4526 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
4527 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4530 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
4531 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
4532 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
4533 \let\section = \numberedsec
4534 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4535 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4537 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
4539 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
4540 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
4541 % overlong headings to fold.
4542 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
4543 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
4544 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
4545 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
4548 \def\majorheading{%
4549 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
4550 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
4553 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
4554 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
4555 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4556 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4557 \rm #1\hfill}}%
4558 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
4559 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4562 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
4563 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4564 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4565 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4566 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4567 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4568 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4570 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
4571 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
4572 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
4574 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
4575 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
4577 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
4578 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
4580 \newskip\chapheadingskip
4582 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
4583 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
4584 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
4586 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
4588 \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
4589 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4590 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
4591 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
4593 \def\CHAPPAGon{%
4594 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4595 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
4596 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
4597 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
4599 \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
4600 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
4601 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
4602 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
4603 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
4605 \CHAPPAGon
4607 % Chapter opening.
4609 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
4610 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
4612 % To test against our argument.
4613 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
4614 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
4615 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
4617 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
4618 \pchapsepmacro
4620 \chapfonts \rm
4622 % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
4623 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
4624 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
4625 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4626 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
4628 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
4629 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
4630 \def\temptype{#2}%
4631 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4632 \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4633 \def\toctype{unnchap}%
4634 \gdef\thischapternum{}%
4635 \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
4636 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4637 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
4638 \def\toctype{omit}%
4639 \gdef\thischapternum{}%
4640 \gdef\thischapter{}%
4641 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4642 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
4643 \def\toctype{app}%
4644 \xdef\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
4645 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
4646 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't
4647 % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
4649 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
4650 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4651 \else
4652 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
4653 \def\toctype{numchap}%
4654 \xdef\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
4655 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
4656 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4657 \fi\fi\fi
4659 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
4660 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
4661 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
4662 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
4664 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
4665 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
4666 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
4667 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
4668 % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
4669 \donoderef{#2}%
4671 % Typeset the actual heading.
4672 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4673 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
4674 \unhbox0 #1\par}%
4676 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
4677 \nobreak
4680 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
4681 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4682 \def\centerparameters{%
4683 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
4684 \leftskip = \rightskip
4685 \parfillskip = 0pt
4689 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
4690 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
4692 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
4694 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
4695 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4696 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4697 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4699 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
4700 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
4701 \par\penalty 5000 %
4703 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
4704 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4705 \parindent=0pt
4706 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4708 \def\CHAPFopen{%
4709 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
4710 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
4713 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
4714 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
4716 \newskip\secheadingskip
4717 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
4719 % Subsection titles.
4720 \newskip\subsecheadingskip
4721 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
4723 % Subsubsection titles.
4724 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
4725 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
4728 % Print any size, any type, section title.
4730 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
4731 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
4732 % section number.
4734 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
4736 % Switch to the right set of fonts.
4737 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
4739 % Insert space above the heading.
4740 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
4742 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
4743 \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
4744 \def\temptype{#3}%
4746 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4747 \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4748 \def\toctype{unn}%
4749 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4750 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4751 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
4752 % and don't redefine \thissection.
4753 \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4754 \def\toctype{omit}%
4755 \let\sectionlevel=\empty
4756 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4757 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4758 \def\toctype{app}%
4759 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4760 \else
4761 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4762 \def\toctype{num}%
4763 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4764 \fi\fi\fi
4766 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
4767 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
4769 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
4770 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
4771 \donoderef{#3}%
4773 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
4774 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
4775 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
4776 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
4777 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
4778 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
4779 \nobreak
4781 % Output the actual section heading.
4782 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4783 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
4784 \unhbox0 #1}%
4786 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
4787 % Don't allow stretch, though.
4788 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
4790 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
4791 % was followed by glue.
4792 \nobreak
4794 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
4795 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
4796 % discardable item.)
4797 \vskip-\parskip
4799 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
4800 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
4801 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
4803 % @section sec-whatever
4804 % @deffn def-whatever
4805 \penalty 10001
4809 \message{toc,}
4810 % Table of contents.
4811 \newwrite\tocfile
4813 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
4814 % Called from @chapter, etc.
4816 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
4817 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
4818 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
4819 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
4820 % destination to jump to.
4822 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
4823 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
4824 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
4825 % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
4827 \newif\iftocfileopened
4828 \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
4830 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
4831 \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
4832 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
4833 \iftocfileopened\else
4834 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
4835 \global\tocfileopenedtrue
4838 \iflinks
4839 {\atdummies
4840 \edef\temp{%
4841 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
4842 \temp
4847 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
4848 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
4849 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
4850 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
4851 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
4852 % `1', and two named `2'.
4853 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
4857 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
4858 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
4859 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
4861 \def\activecatcodes{%
4862 \catcode`\"=\active
4863 \catcode`\$=\active
4864 \catcode`\<=\active
4865 \catcode`\>=\active
4866 \catcode`\\=\active
4867 \catcode`\^=\active
4868 \catcode`\_=\active
4869 \catcode`\|=\active
4870 \catcode`\~=\active
4874 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
4875 \def\readtocfile{%
4876 \setupdatafile
4877 \activecatcodes
4878 \input \jobname.toc
4881 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
4882 \newcount\savepageno
4883 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
4885 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
4887 \def\startcontents#1{%
4888 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
4889 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
4890 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
4891 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
4892 \contentsalignmacro
4893 \immediate\closeout\tocfile
4895 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
4896 % It is abundantly clear what they are.
4897 \def\thischapter{}%
4898 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
4900 \savepageno = \pageno
4901 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
4902 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
4903 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
4905 % Roman numerals for page numbers.
4906 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
4910 % Normal (long) toc.
4911 \def\contents{%
4912 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
4913 \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4914 \ifeof 1 \else
4915 \readtocfile
4917 \vfill \eject
4918 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4919 \ifeof 1 \else
4920 \pdfmakeoutlines
4922 \closein 1
4923 \endgroup
4924 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4925 \global\pageno = \savepageno
4928 % And just the chapters.
4929 \def\summarycontents{%
4930 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4932 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
4933 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
4934 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
4935 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4936 \secfonts
4937 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
4938 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
4940 \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4941 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4942 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
4943 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
4944 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
4945 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4946 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4947 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4948 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4949 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4950 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4951 \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4952 \ifeof 1 \else
4953 \readtocfile
4955 \closein 1
4956 \vfill \eject
4957 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4958 \endgroup
4959 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4960 \global\pageno = \savepageno
4962 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4964 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4965 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4967 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4968 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4969 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4970 % But use \hss just in case.
4971 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4972 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4974 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
4975 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
4976 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
4977 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
4978 % there are before deciding ...
4979 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
4982 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4983 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4984 % The last argument is the page number.
4985 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4987 % Chapters, in the main contents.
4988 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4990 % Chapters, in the short toc.
4991 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4992 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
4993 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
4996 % Appendices, in the main contents.
4997 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
4999 \def\appendixbox#1{%
5000 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
5001 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
5002 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
5004 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5006 % Unnumbered chapters.
5007 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
5008 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
5010 % Sections.
5011 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5012 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
5013 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
5015 % Subsections.
5016 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5017 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
5018 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
5020 % And subsubsections.
5021 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
5022 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
5023 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
5025 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
5026 % Same as \defaultparindent.
5027 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
5029 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
5030 % page number.
5032 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
5033 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
5034 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
5035 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
5036 \begingroup
5037 \chapentryfonts
5038 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5039 \endgroup
5040 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
5043 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5044 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
5045 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5046 \endgroup}
5048 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5049 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
5050 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5051 \endgroup}
5053 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
5054 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
5055 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
5056 \endgroup}
5058 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
5059 \let\tocentry = \entry
5061 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
5062 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
5064 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
5065 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
5067 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
5068 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
5069 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
5070 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
5073 \message{environments,}
5074 % @foo ... @end foo.
5076 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
5078 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
5079 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
5081 \def\point{$\star$}
5082 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
5083 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
5084 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
5085 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
5087 % The @error{} command.
5088 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
5090 \newbox\errorbox
5092 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
5093 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
5094 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
5095 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
5097 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
5098 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
5099 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
5100 \vbox{%
5101 \hrule height\dimen2
5102 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
5103 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
5104 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
5105 \hrule height\dimen2}
5106 \hfil}
5108 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
5110 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
5111 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
5112 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
5114 \envdef\tex{%
5115 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
5116 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
5117 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
5118 \catcode `\%=14
5119 \catcode `\+=\other
5120 \catcode `\"=\other
5121 \catcode `\|=\other
5122 \catcode `\<=\other
5123 \catcode `\>=\other
5124 \escapechar=`\\
5126 \let\b=\ptexb
5127 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
5128 \let\c=\ptexc
5129 \let\,=\ptexcomma
5130 \let\.=\ptexdot
5131 \let\dots=\ptexdots
5132 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
5133 \let\!=\ptexexclam
5134 \let\i=\ptexi
5135 \let\indent=\ptexindent
5136 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
5137 \let\{=\ptexlbrace
5138 \let\+=\tabalign
5139 \let\}=\ptexrbrace
5140 \let\/=\ptexslash
5141 \let\*=\ptexstar
5142 \let\t=\ptext
5143 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
5145 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
5146 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
5147 \def\@{@}%
5149 % There is no need to define \Etex.
5151 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
5152 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
5153 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
5155 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
5156 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
5158 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
5159 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
5160 % have any width.
5161 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
5163 % This space is always present above and below environments.
5164 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
5166 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
5167 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
5168 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
5169 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
5171 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
5172 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
5173 % \sectionheading, q.v.
5174 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
5175 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
5176 \endgraf
5177 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
5178 \removelastskip
5179 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
5180 % or better ...
5181 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
5182 \vskip\envskipamount
5187 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
5189 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
5190 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
5191 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
5193 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
5194 % environment contents.
5195 \font\circle=lcircle10
5196 \newdimen\circthick
5197 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
5198 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
5199 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
5201 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
5202 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
5203 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
5204 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
5205 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
5206 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
5207 \hskip\rskip}}
5208 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
5209 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
5210 \hskip\rskip}}
5212 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
5214 \envdef\cartouche{%
5215 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
5216 \startsavinginserts
5217 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
5218 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
5219 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
5220 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
5221 \cartouter=\hsize
5222 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
5223 % side, and for 6pt waste from
5224 % each corner char, and rule thickness
5225 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
5226 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
5227 \let\nonarrowing = t%
5228 \vbox\bgroup
5229 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
5230 \carttop
5231 \hbox\bgroup
5232 \hskip\lskip
5233 \vrule\kern3pt
5234 \vbox\bgroup
5235 \kern3pt
5236 \hsize=\cartinner
5237 \baselineskip=\normbskip
5238 \lineskip=\normlskip
5239 \parskip=\normpskip
5240 \vskip -\parskip
5241 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
5243 \def\Ecartouche{%
5244 \ifhmode\par\fi
5245 \kern3pt
5246 \egroup
5247 \kern3pt\vrule
5248 \hskip\rskip
5249 \egroup
5250 \cartbot
5251 \egroup
5252 \checkinserts
5256 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
5257 % inside a group.
5258 \def\nonfillstart{%
5259 \aboveenvbreak
5260 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
5261 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
5262 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
5263 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
5264 \parskip = 0pt
5265 \parindent = 0pt
5266 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
5267 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5268 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5269 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
5270 \else
5271 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
5273 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
5276 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
5277 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
5278 % This affects the following displayed environments:
5279 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
5281 \def\smallword{small}
5282 \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
5283 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
5284 \def\setnormaldispenv{%
5285 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
5286 \smallexamplefonts \rm
5289 \def\setsmalldispenv{%
5290 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
5291 \else
5292 \smallexamplefonts \rm
5296 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
5297 % Let's do it by one command:
5298 \def\makedispenv #1#2{
5299 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
5300 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
5301 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5302 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5305 % Define two synonyms:
5306 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
5307 \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
5308 \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
5311 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
5313 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
5314 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
5316 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
5317 \nonfillstart
5318 \tt\quoteexpand
5319 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
5320 \gobble % eat return
5322 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
5324 \makedispenv {display}{%
5325 \nonfillstart
5326 \gobble
5329 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
5331 \makedispenv{format}{%
5332 \let\nonarrowing = t%
5333 \nonfillstart
5334 \gobble
5337 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
5338 \envdef\flushleft{%
5339 \let\nonarrowing = t%
5340 \nonfillstart
5341 \gobble
5343 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
5345 % @flushright.
5347 \envdef\flushright{%
5348 \let\nonarrowing = t%
5349 \nonfillstart
5350 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
5351 \gobble
5353 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
5356 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
5357 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
5358 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
5359 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
5361 \envdef\quotation{%
5362 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
5363 \parindent=0pt
5365 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
5366 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5367 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5368 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
5369 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
5370 \else
5371 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
5373 \parsearg\quotationlabel
5376 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
5377 % doing normal filling.
5379 \def\Equotation{%
5380 \par
5381 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
5382 % indent a bit.
5383 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
5385 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
5388 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
5389 \def\quotationlabel#1{%
5390 \def\temp{#1}%
5391 \ifx\temp\empty \else
5392 {\bf #1: }%
5397 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
5398 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
5399 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
5400 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
5402 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
5404 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
5405 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
5406 % verbatim line.
5407 \def\dospecials{%
5408 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
5409 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
5410 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
5413 % [Knuth] p. 380
5414 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
5415 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
5417 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
5418 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
5419 \begingroup
5420 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
5421 \endgroup
5423 % Setup for the @verb command.
5425 % Eight spaces for a tab
5426 \begingroup
5427 \catcode`\^^I=\active
5428 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
5429 \endgroup
5431 \def\setupverb{%
5432 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5433 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
5434 \catcode`\`=\active
5435 \tabeightspaces
5436 % Respect line breaks,
5437 % print special symbols as themselves, and
5438 % make each space count
5439 % must do in this order:
5440 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5443 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
5445 % Real tab expansion
5446 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
5448 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
5450 % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
5451 % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
5452 % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
5453 % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
5454 % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
5455 % regular 0x27.
5457 \def\codequoteright{%
5458 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
5460 \else
5461 \char'15
5465 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
5466 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
5467 % the code environments to do likewise.
5469 \def\codequoteleft{%
5470 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
5472 \else
5473 \char'22
5477 \begingroup
5478 \catcode`\^^I=\active
5479 \gdef\tabexpand{%
5480 \catcode`\^^I=\active
5481 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
5482 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
5483 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
5484 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
5485 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
5486 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
5489 \catcode`\'=\active
5490 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}%
5492 \catcode`\`=\active
5493 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}%
5495 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}%
5496 \endgroup
5498 % start the verbatim environment.
5499 \def\setupverbatim{%
5500 \let\nonarrowing = t%
5501 \nonfillstart
5502 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5504 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
5505 \catcode`\`=\active
5506 \tabexpand
5507 \quoteexpand
5508 % Respect line breaks,
5509 % print special symbols as themselves, and
5510 % make each space count
5511 % must do in this order:
5512 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5513 \everypar{\starttabbox}%
5516 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
5517 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
5518 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
5520 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
5522 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
5523 \begingroup
5524 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
5525 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
5526 \endgroup
5528 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
5531 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
5532 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
5534 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
5536 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
5537 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
5538 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
5540 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
5542 \begingroup
5543 \catcode`\ =\active
5544 \obeylines %
5545 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
5546 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
5547 % line in the output.
5548 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
5549 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
5550 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
5551 \endgroup
5553 \envdef\verbatim{%
5554 \setupverbatim\doverbatim
5556 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
5559 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
5561 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
5563 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
5565 \makevalueexpandable
5566 \setupverbatim
5567 \input #1
5568 \afterenvbreak
5572 % @copying ... @end copying.
5573 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
5575 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
5576 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
5577 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
5578 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
5579 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
5580 % possible is very desirable.
5582 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
5583 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
5585 \def\insertcopying{%
5586 \begingroup
5587 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
5588 \scanexp\copyingtext
5589 \endgroup
5592 \message{defuns,}
5593 % @defun etc.
5595 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
5596 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
5597 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
5599 % Start the processing of @deffn:
5600 \def\startdefun{%
5601 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
5602 \medbreak
5603 \else
5604 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
5605 % which is there to keep the function description together with its
5606 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
5607 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
5608 % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
5609 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
5610 % a break between a section heading and a defun.
5612 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
5614 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
5615 % But do insert the glue.
5616 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
5619 \parindent=0in
5620 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
5621 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5624 \def\dodefunx#1{%
5625 % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
5626 \checkenv#1%
5628 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
5629 % It's not a great place, though.
5630 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
5632 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
5633 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
5635 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
5637 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
5639 \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
5640 \begingroup
5641 % call \deffnheader:
5642 #1#2 \endheader
5643 % common ending:
5644 \interlinepenalty = 10000
5645 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5646 \endgraf
5647 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
5648 \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
5649 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
5650 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
5651 \checkparencounts
5652 \endgroup
5655 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
5657 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
5658 % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
5660 \def\makedefun#1{%
5661 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
5662 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
5663 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
5664 \temp
5667 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
5669 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
5670 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
5672 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
5673 \envdef#1{%
5674 \startdefun
5675 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
5677 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
5678 \def#3%
5681 %%% Untyped functions:
5683 % @deffn category name args
5684 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
5686 % @deffn category class name args
5687 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5689 % \defopon {category on}class name args
5690 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5692 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
5694 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
5695 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
5696 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
5697 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
5700 %%% Typed functions:
5702 % @deftypefn category type name args
5703 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
5705 % @deftypeop category class type name args
5706 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5708 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
5709 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5711 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
5713 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5714 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5715 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5718 %%% Typed variables:
5720 % @deftypevr category type var args
5721 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
5723 % @deftypecv category class type var args
5724 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5726 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
5727 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5729 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
5731 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5732 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5733 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5736 %%% Untyped variables:
5738 % @defvr category var args
5739 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
5741 % @defcv category class var args
5742 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5744 % \defcvof {category of}class var args
5745 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
5747 %%% Type:
5748 % @deftp category name args
5749 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
5750 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
5751 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
5754 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
5755 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5756 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
5757 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
5758 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5759 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5760 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
5761 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5762 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
5763 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
5764 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5765 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5767 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
5768 % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
5769 % #2 is the return type, if any.
5770 % #3 is the function name.
5772 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
5774 \def\defname#1#2#3{%
5775 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
5776 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5778 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
5779 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
5780 % just below it.
5781 \def\temp{#1}%
5782 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
5784 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
5785 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
5786 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
5787 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
5788 % The continuations:
5789 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
5790 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
5791 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
5793 % Put the type name to the right margin.
5794 \noindent
5795 \hbox to 0pt{%
5796 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
5797 % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
5798 \kern\leftskip
5799 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
5802 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
5803 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
5804 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5806 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
5807 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
5808 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
5809 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
5810 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
5811 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
5812 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
5813 % one has made identifiers using them :).
5814 \df \tt
5815 \def\temp{#2}% return value type
5816 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
5817 #3% output function name
5819 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
5821 \boldbrax
5822 % arguments will be output next, if any.
5825 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
5826 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
5827 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
5828 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
5830 \def\defunargs#1{%
5831 % use sl by default (not ttsl),
5832 % tt for the names.
5833 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
5835 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
5836 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
5837 \let\var=\ttslanted
5839 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
5842 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
5844 \def\activeparens{%
5845 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
5846 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
5847 \catcode`\&=\active
5850 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
5851 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
5853 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
5854 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
5855 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
5857 \activeparens
5858 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
5859 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
5860 \global\let& = \&
5862 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
5863 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
5866 \newcount\parencount
5868 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
5869 \newif\ifampseen
5870 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
5872 \def\parenfont{%
5873 \ifampseen
5874 % At the first level, print parens in roman,
5875 % otherwise use the default font.
5876 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
5877 \else
5878 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
5879 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
5883 \def\infirstlevel#1{%
5884 \ifampseen
5885 \ifnum\parencount=1
5890 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
5892 \def\opnr{%
5893 \global\advance\parencount by 1
5894 {\parenfont(}%
5895 \infirstlevel \bfafterword
5897 \def\clnr{%
5898 {\parenfont)}%
5899 \infirstlevel \sl
5900 \global\advance\parencount by -1
5903 \newcount\brackcount
5904 \def\lbrb{%
5905 \global\advance\brackcount by 1
5906 {\bf[}%
5908 \def\rbrb{%
5909 {\bf]}%
5910 \global\advance\brackcount by -1
5913 \def\checkparencounts{%
5914 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
5915 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
5917 \def\badparencount{%
5918 \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
5919 \global\parencount=0
5921 \def\badbrackcount{%
5922 \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
5923 \global\brackcount=0
5927 \message{macros,}
5928 % @macro.
5930 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5931 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5932 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5933 \newwrite\macscribble
5934 \def\scantokens#1{%
5935 \toks0={#1}%
5936 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5937 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5938 \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5939 \input \jobname.tmp
5943 \def\scanmacro#1{%
5944 \begingroup
5945 \newlinechar`\^^M
5946 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5947 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5948 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
5949 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
5950 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
5951 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
5952 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
5953 % ... and \example
5954 \spaceisspace
5956 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5957 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
5958 % --kasal, 29nov03
5959 \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
5960 \endgroup
5963 \def\scanexp#1{%
5964 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
5965 \temp
5968 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
5969 \newtoks\macname % Macro name
5970 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
5972 % List of all defined macros in the form
5973 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
5974 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
5975 % if there is a need.
5976 \def\macrolist{}
5978 % Add the macro to \macrolist
5979 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
5980 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
5981 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
5982 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
5985 % Utility routines.
5986 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
5987 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
5988 % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
5990 \def\cslet#1#2{%
5991 \expandafter\let
5992 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
5993 \csname#2\endcsname
5996 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5997 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5998 {\catcode`\@=11
5999 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
6000 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
6001 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
6002 \def\unbrace#1{#1}
6003 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
6006 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
6007 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
6008 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
6009 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
6010 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
6013 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
6014 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
6015 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
6017 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
6018 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
6019 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
6021 \def\scanctxt{%
6022 \catcode`\"=\other
6023 \catcode`\+=\other
6024 \catcode`\<=\other
6025 \catcode`\>=\other
6026 \catcode`\@=\other
6027 \catcode`\^=\other
6028 \catcode`\_=\other
6029 \catcode`\|=\other
6030 \catcode`\~=\other
6033 \def\scanargctxt{%
6034 \scanctxt
6035 \catcode`\\=\other
6036 \catcode`\^^M=\other
6039 \def\macrobodyctxt{%
6040 \scanctxt
6041 \catcode`\{=\other
6042 \catcode`\}=\other
6043 \catcode`\^^M=\other
6044 \usembodybackslash
6047 \def\macroargctxt{%
6048 \scanctxt
6049 \catcode`\\=\other
6052 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
6053 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
6054 % where N is the macro parameter number.
6055 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
6056 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
6058 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
6059 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
6060 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
6062 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
6064 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
6065 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
6067 \def\macroxxx#1{%
6068 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
6069 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
6070 \paramno=0%
6071 \else
6072 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
6074 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
6075 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
6076 \else
6077 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
6078 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
6079 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
6080 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
6081 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
6083 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
6084 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
6085 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
6086 \fi}
6088 \parseargdef\unmacro{%
6089 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
6090 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
6091 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
6092 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
6093 \begingroup
6094 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
6095 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
6096 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
6097 \endgroup
6098 \else
6099 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
6103 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
6104 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
6106 \def\unmacrodo#1{%
6107 \ifx #1\relax
6108 % remove this
6109 \else
6110 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
6114 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
6115 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
6116 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
6117 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
6118 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
6119 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
6120 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
6122 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
6123 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
6124 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
6125 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
6127 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
6128 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
6129 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
6130 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
6132 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
6133 % the macro is used.
6135 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
6136 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
6137 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
6138 \if#1;\let\next=\relax
6139 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
6140 \advance\paramno by 1%
6141 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
6142 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
6143 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
6144 \fi\next}
6146 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
6147 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
6149 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
6150 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
6151 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
6152 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
6154 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
6155 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
6156 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
6157 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
6158 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
6159 \def\defmacro{%
6160 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
6161 \ifrecursive
6162 \ifcase\paramno
6164 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6165 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
6166 \or % 1
6167 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6168 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
6169 \noexpand\braceorline
6170 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
6171 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
6172 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
6173 \else % many
6174 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6175 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
6176 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
6177 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
6178 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
6179 \expandafter\expandafter
6180 \expandafter\xdef
6181 \expandafter\expandafter
6182 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
6183 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
6185 \else
6186 \ifcase\paramno
6188 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6189 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
6190 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
6191 \or % 1
6192 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6193 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
6194 \noexpand\braceorline
6195 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
6196 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
6197 \egroup
6198 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
6199 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
6200 \else % many
6201 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
6202 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
6203 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
6204 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
6205 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
6206 \expandafter\expandafter
6207 \expandafter\xdef
6208 \expandafter\expandafter
6209 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
6210 \paramlist{%
6211 \egroup
6212 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
6213 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
6215 \fi}
6217 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
6219 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
6220 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
6221 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
6222 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
6223 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
6224 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
6225 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
6226 \expandafter\parsearg
6227 \fi \macnamexxx}
6230 % @alias.
6231 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
6232 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
6233 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
6234 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
6235 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
6237 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
6238 \addtomacrolist{#1}%
6239 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
6241 \next
6245 \message{cross references,}
6247 \newwrite\auxfile
6249 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
6250 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
6252 % @inforef is relatively simple.
6253 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
6254 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
6255 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
6257 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
6258 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
6259 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
6260 % @node foo , bar , ...
6261 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
6263 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
6265 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
6266 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
6267 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
6268 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
6270 \let\nwnode=\node
6271 \let\lastnode=\empty
6273 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
6274 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
6276 \def\donoderef#1{%
6277 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
6278 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
6279 \global\let\lastnode=\empty
6283 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
6285 \newcount\savesfregister
6287 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
6288 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
6289 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
6291 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
6292 % anchor), which consists of three parts:
6293 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
6294 % or the anchor name.
6295 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
6296 % empty for anchors.
6297 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
6299 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
6300 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
6301 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
6303 \def\setref#1#2{%
6304 \pdfmkdest{#1}%
6305 \iflinks
6307 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
6308 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
6309 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
6310 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
6312 \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
6313 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
6314 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
6315 \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
6320 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
6321 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
6322 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
6323 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
6325 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6326 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6327 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6328 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
6329 \unsepspaces
6330 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
6331 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
6332 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
6333 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
6334 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
6335 % No printed node name was explicitly given.
6336 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
6337 % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
6338 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6339 \else
6340 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
6341 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
6342 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6343 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
6344 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6345 \else
6346 \ifhavexrefs
6347 % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
6348 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
6349 \else
6350 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
6351 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6352 \fi%
6357 % Make link in pdf output.
6358 \ifpdf
6359 \leavevmode
6360 \getfilename{#4}%
6361 {\turnoffactive
6362 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
6363 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
6364 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
6366 \ifnum\filenamelength>0
6367 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6368 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
6369 \else
6370 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6371 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
6374 \linkcolor
6377 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
6378 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
6379 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
6381 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
6382 % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
6383 \indexnofonts
6384 \turnoffactive
6385 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
6386 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
6388 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
6389 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
6390 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
6391 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
6392 \refx{#1-snt}{}%
6393 \else
6394 \printedrefname
6397 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
6398 % "in MANUALNAME".
6399 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6400 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6402 \else
6403 % node/anchor (non-float) references.
6405 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
6406 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
6407 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
6408 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
6409 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
6410 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
6411 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6412 \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6413 \else
6414 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
6415 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
6416 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
6417 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
6418 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
6419 {\turnoffactive
6420 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
6421 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
6422 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
6423 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
6425 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
6426 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
6428 % But we always want a comma and a space:
6429 ,\space
6431 % output the `page 3'.
6432 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
6435 \endlink
6436 \endgroup}
6438 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
6439 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
6440 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
6441 % one that Bob is working on :).
6443 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
6445 % Things referred to by \setref.
6447 \def\Ynothing{}
6448 \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
6449 \def\Ynumbered{%
6450 \ifnum\secno=0
6451 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
6452 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6453 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
6454 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6455 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6456 \else
6457 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6458 \fi\fi\fi
6460 \def\Yappendix{%
6461 \ifnum\secno=0
6462 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
6463 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6464 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
6465 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6466 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6467 \else
6468 \putwordSection@tie
6469 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6470 \fi\fi\fi
6473 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
6474 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
6476 \def\refx#1#2{%
6478 \indexnofonts
6479 \otherbackslash
6480 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
6481 \csname XR#1\endcsname
6483 \ifx\thisrefX\relax
6484 % If not defined, say something at least.
6485 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
6486 \iflinks
6487 \ifhavexrefs
6488 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
6489 \else
6490 \ifwarnedxrefs\else
6491 \global\warnedxrefstrue
6492 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
6496 \else
6497 % It's defined, so just use it.
6498 \thisrefX
6500 #2% Output the suffix in any case.
6503 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
6504 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
6505 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
6507 \def\xrdef#1#2{%
6508 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
6510 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
6511 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
6512 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
6513 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
6514 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
6516 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
6517 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
6518 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
6519 \else
6520 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
6521 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
6524 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
6525 % for later use in \listoffloats.
6526 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
6530 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
6532 \def\tryauxfile{%
6533 \openin 1 \jobname.aux
6534 \ifeof 1 \else
6535 \readdatafile{aux}%
6536 \global\havexrefstrue
6538 \closein 1
6541 \def\setupdatafile{%
6542 \catcode`\^^@=\other
6543 \catcode`\^^A=\other
6544 \catcode`\^^B=\other
6545 \catcode`\^^C=\other
6546 \catcode`\^^D=\other
6547 \catcode`\^^E=\other
6548 \catcode`\^^F=\other
6549 \catcode`\^^G=\other
6550 \catcode`\^^H=\other
6551 \catcode`\^^K=\other
6552 \catcode`\^^L=\other
6553 \catcode`\^^N=\other
6554 \catcode`\^^P=\other
6555 \catcode`\^^Q=\other
6556 \catcode`\^^R=\other
6557 \catcode`\^^S=\other
6558 \catcode`\^^T=\other
6559 \catcode`\^^U=\other
6560 \catcode`\^^V=\other
6561 \catcode`\^^W=\other
6562 \catcode`\^^X=\other
6563 \catcode`\^^Z=\other
6564 \catcode`\^^[=\other
6565 \catcode`\^^\=\other
6566 \catcode`\^^]=\other
6567 \catcode`\^^^=\other
6568 \catcode`\^^_=\other
6569 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
6570 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
6571 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
6572 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
6573 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
6574 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
6575 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
6576 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
6578 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
6579 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
6580 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
6582 \catcode`\^=\other
6584 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
6585 \catcode`\~=\other
6586 \catcode`\[=\other
6587 \catcode`\]=\other
6588 \catcode`\"=\other
6589 \catcode`\_=\other
6590 \catcode`\|=\other
6591 \catcode`\<=\other
6592 \catcode`\>=\other
6593 \catcode`\$=\other
6594 \catcode`\#=\other
6595 \catcode`\&=\other
6596 \catcode`\%=\other
6597 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
6599 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
6600 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
6601 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
6602 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
6603 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
6604 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
6605 % now. --karl, 15jan04.
6606 \catcode`\\=\other
6608 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
6610 \count1=128
6611 \def\loop{%
6612 \catcode\count1=\other
6613 \advance\count1 by 1
6614 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
6618 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
6619 \catcode`\{=1
6620 \catcode`\}=2
6621 \catcode`\@=0
6624 \def\readdatafile#1{%
6625 \begingroup
6626 \setupdatafile
6627 \input\jobname.#1
6628 \endgroup}
6630 \message{insertions,}
6631 % including footnotes.
6633 \newcount \footnoteno
6635 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
6636 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
6637 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
6638 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
6639 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
6640 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
6642 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
6643 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
6645 {\catcode `\@=11
6647 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
6648 \gdef\footnote{%
6649 \let\indent=\ptexindent
6650 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6651 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
6652 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
6654 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
6655 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
6656 \let\@sf\empty
6657 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
6659 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
6660 \unskip
6661 \thisfootno\@sf
6662 \dofootnote
6665 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
6666 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
6668 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
6669 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
6670 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
6672 \gdef\dofootnote{%
6673 \insert\footins\bgroup
6674 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
6675 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
6676 % So reset some parameters.
6677 \hsize=\pagewidth
6678 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
6679 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
6680 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
6681 \floatingpenalty\@MM
6682 \leftskip\z@skip
6683 \rightskip\z@skip
6684 \spaceskip\z@skip
6685 \xspaceskip\z@skip
6686 \parindent\defaultparindent
6688 \smallfonts \rm
6690 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
6691 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
6692 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
6693 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
6694 \let\noindent = \relax
6696 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
6697 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
6698 \everypar = {\hang}%
6699 \textindent{\thisfootno}%
6701 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
6702 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
6703 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
6704 \footstrut
6705 \futurelet\next\fo@t
6707 }%end \catcode `\@=11
6709 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
6710 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
6711 % would be lost.
6712 % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
6713 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
6714 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
6716 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
6717 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
6718 % out prematurely.
6720 \def\startsavinginserts{%
6721 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
6722 \let\insert\saveinsert
6723 \else
6724 \let\checkinserts\relax
6728 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
6729 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
6731 \def\saveinsert#1{%
6732 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
6733 \afterassignment\next
6734 % swallow the left brace
6735 \let\temp =
6737 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
6738 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
6740 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
6742 \def\placesaveins#1{%
6743 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
6744 {\box#1}%
6747 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
6749 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
6750 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
6753 % initialization:
6754 \def\newsaveins #1{%
6755 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
6756 \next
6758 \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
6759 \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
6760 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
6761 \checksaveins #1}%
6764 % initialize:
6765 \let\checkinserts\empty
6766 \newsaveins\footins
6767 \newsaveins\margin
6770 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
6771 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
6773 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
6774 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
6775 % undone and the next image would fail.
6776 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
6777 \ifeof 1 \else
6778 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
6779 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
6780 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
6781 \input epsf.tex
6783 \closein 1
6785 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
6786 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
6787 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
6788 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
6789 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
6791 \def\image#1{%
6792 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
6793 \ifwarnednoepsf \else
6794 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
6795 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
6796 \global\warnednoepsftrue
6798 \else
6799 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
6803 % Arguments to @image:
6804 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
6805 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
6806 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
6807 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
6808 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
6809 \newif\ifimagevmode
6810 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
6811 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
6812 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
6813 % If the image is by itself, center it.
6814 \ifvmode
6815 \imagevmodetrue
6816 \nobreak\bigskip
6817 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
6818 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
6819 % above and below.
6820 \nobreak\vskip\parskip
6821 \nobreak
6822 \line\bgroup
6825 % Output the image.
6826 \ifpdf
6827 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6828 \else
6829 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
6830 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
6831 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
6832 \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
6835 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
6836 \endgroup}
6839 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
6840 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
6841 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
6843 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
6845 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
6846 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
6848 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
6849 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
6850 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
6852 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
6853 % be referable.
6855 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
6856 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
6858 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
6859 % chapter-level command.
6860 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
6862 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
6863 \let\thiscaption=\empty
6864 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
6866 % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
6868 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6869 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6871 \startsavinginserts
6873 % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
6874 \par
6876 \vtop\bgroup
6877 \def\floattype{#1}%
6878 \def\floatlabel{#2}%
6879 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
6881 \ifx\floattype\empty
6882 \let\safefloattype=\empty
6883 \else
6885 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6886 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6887 \indexnofonts
6888 \turnoffactive
6889 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6893 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
6894 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6895 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
6896 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
6898 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
6899 \global\advance\floatno by 1
6902 % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
6903 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
6904 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
6905 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
6906 % lists of floats.
6908 \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
6909 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
6913 % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
6914 \vskip\parskip
6916 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
6917 \restorefirstparagraphindent
6920 % we have these possibilities:
6921 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
6922 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
6923 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
6924 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
6925 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
6926 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
6927 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
6928 % @float & no caption:
6930 \def\Efloat{%
6931 \let\floatident = \empty
6933 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
6934 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
6936 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
6937 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6938 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
6939 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
6941 % the number.
6942 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6945 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
6946 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
6947 \let\captionline = \floatident
6949 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
6950 \ifx\floatident\empty \else
6951 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
6954 % caption text.
6955 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
6958 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
6959 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
6960 \ifx\captionline\empty \else
6961 \vskip.5\parskip
6962 \captionline
6964 % Space below caption.
6965 \vskip\parskip
6968 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
6969 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
6970 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6971 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
6972 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
6973 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
6975 \atdummies
6977 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
6978 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
6979 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
6980 \scanexp{%
6981 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
6982 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
6983 \thiscaption
6984 \else
6985 \thisshortcaption
6989 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
6990 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
6993 \egroup % end of \vtop
6995 % place the captured inserts
6997 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
6998 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
6999 % float. --kasal, 26may04
7001 \checkinserts
7004 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
7006 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
7007 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
7010 % @caption, @shortcaption
7012 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
7013 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
7014 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
7015 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
7017 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
7018 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
7019 \def\getfloatno#1{%
7020 \ifx#1\relax
7021 % Haven't seen this figure type before.
7022 \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
7024 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
7025 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
7026 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
7028 \let\floatno#1%
7031 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
7032 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
7033 % first read the @float command.
7035 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
7037 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
7038 % distinguish floats from other xref types.
7039 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
7041 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
7042 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
7043 % \thissection value which we \setref above.
7045 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
7047 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
7048 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
7050 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
7051 \def\temp{#1}%
7052 \def\iffloattype{#2}%
7053 \ifx\temp\floatmagic
7056 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
7058 \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
7059 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
7061 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
7062 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
7063 \indexnofonts
7064 \turnoffactive
7065 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
7068 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
7069 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
7070 \ifhavexrefs
7071 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
7072 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
7074 \else
7075 \begingroup
7076 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
7077 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
7078 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
7079 \endgroup
7083 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
7084 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
7085 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
7086 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
7088 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
7089 % they won't appear in the aux file).
7091 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
7092 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
7093 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
7094 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
7095 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
7096 % in pdf output.
7097 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
7099 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
7100 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
7101 \writeentry
7104 \message{localization,}
7105 % and i18n.
7107 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
7108 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
7109 % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
7110 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
7112 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
7113 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
7114 % Read the file if it exists.
7115 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
7116 \ifeof 1
7117 \errhelp = \nolanghelp
7118 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
7119 \else
7120 \input txi-#1.tex
7122 \closein 1
7123 \endgroup
7125 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
7126 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
7127 should work if nowhere else does.}
7130 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
7131 % likely, but for now just recognize it.
7132 \let\documentencoding = \comment
7135 % Page size parameters.
7137 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
7139 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
7140 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
7141 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
7143 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
7144 \vbadness = 10000
7146 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
7147 \hbadness = 2000
7149 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
7150 \widowpenalty=10000
7151 \clubpenalty=10000
7153 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
7154 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
7155 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
7156 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
7158 \def\setemergencystretch{%
7159 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
7160 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
7161 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
7162 \else
7163 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
7167 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
7168 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
7169 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
7171 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
7172 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
7174 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
7175 \voffset = #3\relax
7176 \topskip = #6\relax
7177 \splittopskip = \topskip
7179 \vsize = #1\relax
7180 \advance\vsize by \topskip
7181 \outervsize = \vsize
7182 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
7183 \pageheight = \vsize
7185 \hsize = #2\relax
7186 \outerhsize = \hsize
7187 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
7188 \pagewidth = \hsize
7190 \normaloffset = #4\relax
7191 \bindingoffset = #5\relax
7193 \ifpdf
7194 \pdfpageheight #7\relax
7195 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
7198 \setleading{\textleading}
7200 \parindent = \defaultparindent
7201 \setemergencystretch
7204 % @letterpaper (the default).
7205 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
7206 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
7207 \textleading = 13.2pt
7209 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
7210 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
7211 {\voffset}{.25in}%
7212 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
7213 {11in}{8.5in}%
7216 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
7217 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
7218 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
7219 \textleading = 12pt
7221 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
7222 {\voffset}{.25in}%
7223 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
7224 {9.25in}{7in}%
7226 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
7227 \tolerance = 700
7228 \hfuzz = 1pt
7229 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7230 \defbodyindent = .5cm
7233 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
7234 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
7235 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
7236 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
7237 \textleading = 12pt
7239 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
7240 {-.2in}{-.4in}%
7241 {0pt}{14pt}%
7242 {9in}{6in}%
7244 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
7245 \tolerance = 700
7246 \hfuzz = 1pt
7247 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7248 \defbodyindent = .4cm
7251 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
7252 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
7253 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
7254 \textleading = 13.2pt
7256 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
7257 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
7258 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
7259 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
7260 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
7261 % your texinfo source file like this:
7262 % @tex
7263 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
7264 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
7265 % @end tex
7266 \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
7267 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
7268 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
7269 {297mm}{210mm}%
7271 \tolerance = 700
7272 \hfuzz = 1pt
7273 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7274 \defbodyindent = 5mm
7277 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
7278 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
7279 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
7280 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
7281 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
7282 \textleading = 12.5pt
7284 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
7285 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
7286 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
7287 {210mm}{148mm}%
7289 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
7290 \tolerance = 800
7291 \hfuzz = 1.2pt
7292 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7293 \defbodyindent = 2mm
7294 \tableindent = 12mm
7297 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
7298 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
7299 \afourpaper
7300 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
7301 {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
7302 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7303 {297mm}{210mm}%
7305 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
7306 \globaldefs = 0
7309 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
7310 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
7311 \afourpaper
7312 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
7313 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
7314 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7315 {297mm}{210mm}%
7316 \globaldefs = 0
7319 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
7320 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
7321 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
7323 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
7324 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
7325 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
7326 \globaldefs = 1
7328 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
7329 \setleading{\textleading}%
7331 \dimen0 = #1
7332 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
7334 \dimen2 = \hsize
7335 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
7337 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
7338 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
7339 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
7340 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
7343 % Set default to letter.
7345 \letterpaper
7348 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
7350 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
7351 \catcode`\"=\other
7352 \catcode`\~=\other
7353 \catcode`\^=\other
7354 \catcode`\_=\other
7355 \catcode`\|=\other
7356 \catcode`\<=\other
7357 \catcode`\>=\other
7358 \catcode`\+=\other
7359 \catcode`\$=\other
7360 \def\normaldoublequote{"}
7361 \def\normaltilde{~}
7362 \def\normalcaret{^}
7363 \def\normalunderscore{_}
7364 \def\normalverticalbar{|}
7365 \def\normalless{<}
7366 \def\normalgreater{>}
7367 \def\normalplus{+}
7368 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
7370 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
7371 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
7372 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
7374 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
7375 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
7376 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
7377 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
7379 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7381 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
7382 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
7383 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
7384 % this is not a problem.
7385 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7387 % Turn off all special characters except @
7388 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
7389 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
7390 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
7392 \catcode`\"=\active
7393 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
7394 \let"=\activedoublequote
7395 \catcode`\~=\active
7396 \def~{{\tt\char126}}
7397 \chardef\hat=`\^
7398 \catcode`\^=\active
7399 \def^{{\tt \hat}}
7401 \catcode`\_=\active
7402 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
7403 \let\realunder=_
7404 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
7405 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
7407 \catcode`\|=\active
7408 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
7409 \chardef \less=`\<
7410 \catcode`\<=\active
7411 \def<{{\tt \less}}
7412 \chardef \gtr=`\>
7413 \catcode`\>=\active
7414 \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
7415 \catcode`\+=\active
7416 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
7417 \catcode`\$=\active
7418 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
7420 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
7421 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
7422 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
7423 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
7424 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
7426 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
7427 % parsing them.
7428 \def\turnoffactive{%
7429 \normalturnoffactive
7430 \otherbackslash
7433 \catcode`\@=0
7435 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
7436 % as in \char`\\.
7437 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
7438 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
7440 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
7441 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
7442 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
7444 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
7445 % in fixed width font.
7446 \catcode`\\=\active
7447 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
7448 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
7449 % @let \ = @normalbackslash
7451 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
7452 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
7453 % catcode other.
7454 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
7455 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
7457 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
7458 % the literal character `\'.
7460 @def@normalturnoffactive{%
7461 @let\=@normalbackslash
7462 @let"=@normaldoublequote
7463 @let~=@normaltilde
7464 @let^=@normalcaret
7465 @let_=@normalunderscore
7466 @let|=@normalverticalbar
7467 @let<=@normalless
7468 @let>=@normalgreater
7469 @let+=@normalplus
7470 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
7471 @unsepspaces
7474 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
7475 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
7476 @otherifyactive
7478 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
7479 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
7480 % a backslash.
7482 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
7483 @global@let\ = @eatinput
7485 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
7486 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
7487 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
7488 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
7489 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
7491 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
7492 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
7493 @catcode`+=@active
7494 @catcode`@_=@active
7497 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
7498 @escapechar = `@@
7500 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
7501 @catcode`@& = @other
7502 @catcode`@# = @other
7503 @catcode`@% = @other
7506 @c Local variables:
7507 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
7508 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
7509 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
7510 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
7511 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
7512 @c End:
7514 @c vim:sw=2:
7516 @ignore
7517 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
7518 @end ignore